V8 i (SELECTseries 9)
User Manual
DAA037480-1/000X
Last Updated: August 26, 2014
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................... 49
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
4.4
4.5
RAM Concept
User Manual
4.6
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
RAM Concept
User Manual
5.16.3
90
90
92
92
9.3
9.4
RAM Concept
User Manual
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
Chapter 14: Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System .................................... 124
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
What can be imported from the RAM Structural System .......................................................................................... 124
Controlling which concrete members are imported ................................................................................................... 124
14.2.1 Definition of the import perimeter ................................................................................................................ 125
About load importation ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
Importing a database ................................................................................................................................................................ 127
Reimporting a database ........................................................................................................................................................... 130
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts ................................................................................................................................... 131
14.5.2 To reimport from the RAM Structural System ............................................................................................. 132
Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions ............................................................................................................................ 133
14.6.1 Limitations ................................................................................................................................................................... 133
14.6.2 Defaults .......................................................................................................................................................................... 133
14.6.3 Assumptions ................................................................................................................................................................ 134
Tight integration with the RAM Structural System ..................................................................................................... 135
RAM Concept
User Manual
16.2
16.3
17.20
17.21
17.22
17.23
RAM Concept
User Manual
17.24
17.25
17.26
17.27
18.2
19.7
19.8
19.9
19.10
19.11
19.12
19.13
19.14
19.15
19.16
19.17
19.18
19.19
19.20
19.21
RAM Concept
User Manual
19.22
22.10
22.11
22.12
RAM Concept
User Manual
22.13
22.14
23.5
24.3
24.4
RAM Concept
User Manual
25.11
25.12
25.13
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
26.7
26.8
26.9
26.10
26.11
26.12
RAM Concept
10
User Manual
26.13
26.14
26.15
26.16
26.17
26.12. Drawing a multi-span tendon with the tendon polyline .......................................................................... 308
3
Drawing multiple tendons ...................................................................................................................................................... 308
26.13. Tendon panel layout options ............................................................................................................................... 309
1
Editing tendons ........................................................................................................................................................................... 313
26.14. Calc profile tool .......................................................................................................................................................... 313
1
26.14. Change profiles tool ................................................................................................................................................. 313
2
About jacks .................................................................................................................................................................................... 314
Jack properties ............................................................................................................................................................................. 314
Drawing the jacks ....................................................................................................................................................................... 315
28.2
28.3
28.4
28.5
28.6
28.7
RAM Concept
11
User Manual
29.3
29.4
29.5
RAM Concept
12
User Manual
31.1
31.2
31.3
31.4
31.5
31.6
31.7
How the Auditor can assist the design process ............................................................................................................. 366
About the three design steps ................................................................................................................................................. 366
About the information displayed by the Auditor .......................................................................................................... 367
Using the Auditor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 369
31.4.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary .................................................................................................. 369
Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning ..................................................................................................... 369
About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor ....................................................................... 370
Using the Punching Check Auditor ..................................................................................................................................... 371
31.7.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary .................................................................................................. 371
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
RAM Concept
13
User Manual
34.7
34.8
Chapter 36: Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System ......................................... 389
36.1
36.2
37.4
37.5
37.6
37.7
37.8
37.9
37.10
37.11
RAM Concept
14
User Manual
37.11.
1
37.11.
2
38.3
38.4
39.4
39.5
39.6
39.7
39.8
39.9
39.10
39.11
39.12
RAM Concept
15
User Manual
39.13
40.3
40.4
RAM Concept
16
User Manual
An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. A tendon has a
different number of strands than an adjacent tendon. Investigate tendon #a. ............................. 439
40.4.8 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. A tendon is not
connected to any jacks. Investigate tendon #a. [If any tendons are stressed then all tendons
must be stressed.] ..................................................................................................................................................... 439
Load History Deflections ......................................................................................................................................................... 439
40.5.1 An error has been found while calculating load history deflections. The floor may have
incomplete design strip/cross section coverage to accurately calculate load history deflections.
The slab coverages are a and b in orthogonal directions ........................................................................ 439
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................................................... 440
40.6.1 An Error occurred while trying to calculate everything. An error has occurred while
triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The structure is unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis
Translation. Revise the structure. ...................................................................................................................... 440
40.6.2 An error occurred: Loading has horizontal loads, but the structure is automatically stabilized in
the X and Y directions. ............................................................................................................................................ 440
40.6.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set Service Design do not appear compatible with the load
factors in the load combinations using the rule set. This is likely an error. .................................... 440
40.6.4 Load Combination Service (Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual balance and / or
hyperstatic load factors. This is likely an error. .......................................................................................... 441
40.6.5 Rule Set Strength Design is being used by load combinations that appear to have load factors
set for different purposes. This is likely an error. ....................................................................................... 441
40.6.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There is less that 25% contact area. .............................................. 441
40.6.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a column ............................................................................................. 441
40.6.8 Too many slab shapes intersecting the column shape at (x,y) .............................................................. 442
40.6.9 An error has been found. The cross section trimming for strip ab-c has caused there to be no
concrete remaining at one or more locations. .............................................................................................. 442
40.6.1 An error has been found. [Design strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too much cover (the
bottom bar is closer to the top than the top bar). ....................................................................................... 442
0
40.6.1 A cross section in design strip ab-c has no shear core .............................................................................. 442
1
40.6.1 A cross section in design strip ab-c has a very small shear core .......................................................... 442
2
40.6.1 ab-c contains user transverse reinforcement but has multiple shear cores. Shear/torsion
calculations may be approximate ...................................................................................................................... 443
3
40.6.1 ab-c contains user reinforcement that is not within the primary (largest) shear core. This
transverse reinforcement will be ignored ..................................................................................................... 443
4
40.6.1 An error has been found. ab-c contains multiple user transverse rebar regions ......................... 443
5
40.4.7
40.5
40.6
41.2
41.3
RAM Concept
17
User Manual
41.4
41.5
41.6
42.3
42.4
RAM Concept
18
User Manual
42.5
42.6
42.7
RAM Concept
19
User Manual
43.3
43.4
43.5
43.6
43.7
RAM Concept
20
User Manual
43.7.6
43.7.7
43.7.8
43.7.9
43.7.1
0
44.3
44.4
44.5
RAM Concept
21
User Manual
44.6
44.7
44.5.1 Delete the span segment over the wall ............................................................................................................ 578
0
44.5.1 Edit the span cross section orientation ........................................................................................................... 578
1
44.5.1 Generate the longitude strips .............................................................................................................................. 578
2
44.5.1 Check for punching shear ...................................................................................................................................... 579
3
Regenerate the mesh ................................................................................................................................................................ 580
Calculate and view the results .............................................................................................................................................. 581
44.7.1 Review Calc Options ................................................................................................................................................ 581
44.7.2 Calculate ........................................................................................................................................................................ 581
44.7.3 View the design strips with tendons ................................................................................................................ 581
44.7.4 Edit span segment 6-2 ............................................................................................................................................ 582
44.7.5 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................................... 582
44.7.6 Design status ............................................................................................................................................................... 583
44.7.7 Design reinforcement .............................................................................................................................................. 584
44.7.8 Concrete stresses ...................................................................................................................................................... 585
44.7.9 Deflection ..................................................................................................................................................................... 586
44.7.1 Bending Moments ..................................................................................................................................................... 588
0
45.3
45.4
RAM Concept
22
User Manual
45.5
45.6
45.7
RAM Concept
23
User Manual
46.3
46.4
46.5
46.6
46.7
RAM Concept
24
User Manual
46.7.2
46.7.3
46.7.4
46.7.5
46.7.6
46.7.7
46.7.8
46.7.9
46.7.1
0
47.3
47.4
47.5
RAM Concept
25
User Manual
47.6
47.7
48.3
48.4
RAM Concept
26
User Manual
48.5
48.6
50.2
50.3
50.4
50.5
50.6
50.7
RAM Concept
27
User Manual
50.8
50.9
RAM Concept
28
User Manual
52.1
52.2
52.3
52.4
52.5
52.6
52.7
52.8
52.9
52.10
52.11
52.12
52.13
52.14
52.15
52.16
Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets ............................................................... 781
52.1.1 Loadings ........................................................................................................................................................................ 781
52.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets ..................................................................................................................... 781
Tributary Area Calculations ................................................................................................................................................... 782
Influence Area Calculations .................................................................................................................................................... 782
52.3.1 Example of Influence Areas .................................................................................................................................. 783
ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction ...................................................................................................................................... 787
ASCE-7 2010 Live Load Reduction ...................................................................................................................................... 788
IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction .............................................................................................................................................. 788
IBC 2006 Live Load Reduction .............................................................................................................................................. 788
IBC 2009 Live Load Reduction .............................................................................................................................................. 789
UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction ............................................................................................................................................ 789
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction ..................................................................................................................... 790
BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 790
IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction .................................................................................................................... 790
Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction ................................................................................................... 791
National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction ............................................................................... 791
Mat Foundations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 791
Special Member Considerations ........................................................................................................................................... 791
52.16. Columns Above the Slab ......................................................................................................................................... 792
1
52.16. Columns Above and Below the Slab .................................................................................................................. 792
2
53.2
53.3
53.4
53.5
53.6
RAM Concept
29
User Manual
54.2
54.3
54.4
54.5
54.6
RAM Concept
30
User Manual
54.6.1
2
54.6.1
3
54.6.1
4
54.6.1
5
54.6.1
6
54.6.1
7
54.6.1
8
54.6.1
9
54.6.2
0
54.6.2
1
RAM Concept
31
User Manual
55.3
55.4
55.5
55.6
55.2.1 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + 1.6W .................................................................................................. 847
8
55.2.1 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W .......................................................................................................... 848
9
55.2.2 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6S + 0.8W ............................................................................................................ 848
0
55.2.2 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ f2S + E ....................................................................................................... 848
1
ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors ........................................................................................................ 848
ACI 318-02 Material Behaviors ............................................................................................................................................ 849
55.4.1 Concrete Behavior .................................................................................................................................................... 849
55.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior ................................................................................................ 849
55.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior ............................................................................................. 850
55.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior ........................................................................................ 850
ACI 318-02 code rule selection ............................................................................................................................................. 850
55.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................... 850
55.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................ 851
55.5.3 Initial Service .............................................................................................................................................................. 852
55.5.4 Service ............................................................................................................................................................................ 852
55.5.5 Sustained Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 853
55.5.6 Strength ......................................................................................................................................................................... 853
55.5.7 Ductility ......................................................................................................................................................................... 854
ACI 318-02 code implementation ....................................................................................................................................... 854
55.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement ...................................................................... 854
55.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) ............................................................. 855
55.6.3 Section 10.3.5 Ductility (Non prestressed) .................................................................................................... 856
55.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) ..................... 856
55.6.5 Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) ..................... 857
55.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed) .................................................................. 857
55.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed) ............................................................................ 857
55.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion ................................................................................................................................... 858
55.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems) ................................................................................................................ 859
55.6.1 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit ................................................................................................... 859
0
55.6.1 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit ........................................................... 860
1
55.6.1 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit ....................................................................... 860
2
55.6.1 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit ................................................................................ 861
3
55.6.1 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit ..................................................................................... 861
4
55.6.1 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members ................................................... 861
5
55.6.1 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed) ........................................................................... 862
6
55.6.1 Section 18.8.2 Cracking Moment ........................................................................................................................ 862
7
55.6.1 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way .................................................................................. 863
8
RAM Concept
32
User Manual
55.6.1
9
55.6.2
0
55.6.2
1
RAM Concept
33
User Manual
56.3
56.4
56.5
56.6
RAM Concept
34
User Manual
56.6.2
1
RAM Concept
35
User Manual
57.3
57.4
57.5
57.6
RAM Concept
36
User Manual
58.1
58.2
58.3
58.4
RAM Concept
37
User Manual
58.5
58.6
RAM Concept
38
User Manual
59.3
59.4
59.5
RAM Concept
39
User Manual
59.5.1
4
59.5.1
5
59.5.1
6
60.3
60.4
60.5
60.6
RAM Concept
40
User Manual
60.6.8
60.6.9
60.6.1
0
60.6.1
1
60.6.1
2
60.6.1
3
60.6.1
4
60.6.1
5
60.6.1
6
61.3
61.4
61.5
61.6
RAM Concept
41
User Manual
61.6.4
61.6.5
61.6.6
61.6.7
61.6.8
61.6.9
61.6.1
0
61.6.1
1
61.6.1
2
61.6.1
3
61.6.1
4
61.6.1
5
61.6.1
6
61.6.1
7
61.6.1
8
61.6.1
9
61.6.2
0
61.6.2
1
61.6.2
2
61.6.2
3
61.6.2
4
61.6.2
5
61.6.2
6
61.6.2
7
RAM Concept
42
User Manual
62.3
62.4
62.5
62.6
62.7
RAM Concept
43
User Manual
62.7.1
3
Chapter 63: EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design .......................................... 1026
63.1
63.2
63.3
63.4
RAM Concept
44
User Manual
63.5
RAM Concept
45
User Manual
64.3
64.4
64.5
64.6
RAM Concept
46
User Manual
64.6.1
7
64.6.1
8
64.6.1
9
65.4
65.5
65.6
65.7
66.2
66.3
66.4
66.5
66.6
66.7
66.8
66.9
66.10
66.11
RAM Concept
47
User Manual
67.2
67.3
67.4
RAM Concept
48
User Manual
Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses the finite element method for elevated concrete floor
systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC),
or hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). RAM Concept is extremely powerful and allows you to design an entire floor
in one model, or design individual strips or beams.
In this context, the term design means that:
The user defines the following: structural geometry, loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if
applicable).
RAM Concept calculates (for any number of load combinations): the required amount of reinforcement for
flexure and one-way shear according to relevant code requirements; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for
punching shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections.
A model consists of anything from a single simply supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are
three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip Wizard).
RAM Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and
with the Strip Wizard interface.
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.
RAM Concept
49
User Manual
Introduction
Strip Wizard
There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations for all of these items.
RAM Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for the following:
RAM Concept
50
User Manual
Introduction
Learning RAM Concept
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do
this for evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly relevant.
The (**) rating is meant to indicate relative degree of difficulty, or relative time you would expect to spend on
the stage.
You should not use RAM Concept for final design without a sufficient grounding in concrete design, or adequate
understanding of the program.
The manual contains a large amount of information. Ideally, you should read it all, but this may not be practical.
We recommend that you do the tutorials and read critical chapters.
1.5.1 Tutorials
We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials:
Chapter 41, Simple RC Slab Tutorial.
One of the following PT Tutorial Chapters: 42, 43, 44,45 46, or 46.
Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it is advisable to do one of these tutorials as a thicker RC
slab.
For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 48, Mat Foundation Tutorial.
The tutorials introduce you to the philosophy of the program. They quickly give you experience in some basic
modeling and many of the tools. The descriptions are not exhaustive, and you should reference the actual tool
description in the appropriate chapter for further information. This should prove useful for real projects.
It is recommended that you redo the tutorials. The completed tutorial files are available from the program
directory, so you dont have to start from scratch. For example, you could open the ACI 318-02 PT Tutorial,
delete the design strips, and then start with the design strips input.
RAM Concept
51
User Manual
Introduction
Learning RAM Concept
Chapter 1, Introduction.
Chapter 2, Looking at the Workspace.
Chapter 3, Understanding Layers.
Chapter 4, Using Plans and Perspectives
Chapter 5, Drawing and Editing Objects
Note: Chapter 5 describes snapping. Nearly all meshing problems are due to the users failure to use snapping
properly.
default loadings
default load combinations
live load reduction
assumptions on material behavior
rule selection
rule implementation
In particular, you should review what rules are used and how the authors interpret and implement the rules.
Rules not considered
RAM Concept
52
User Manual
Introduction
Technical support
Specifically, Concept does not consider the following:
ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11: Rule 13.5.3
AS3600-2001/2009 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing bars for 25% of the negative moment) and 9.1.3
BS8110: 1997 Rule 3.7.3.1
RAM Concept
53
User Manual
RAM Concept
54
User Manual
Figure 1: A. Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar contains the set of menus for the program.
Includes the File, Edit, Criteria, Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action Tools for
manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coordinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for
editing the active plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window. G. Report Contents
Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program
status information. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the current cursor location in
plan coordinates.
RAM Concept
55
User Manual
RAM Concept
56
User Manual
RAM Concept
57
User Manual
Figure 2: Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
RAM Concept
58
User Manual
RAM Concept
59
User Manual
Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept , objects (such as walls, columns, slab areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up
the structural model. Since there are so many objects involved in modeling a structure, RAM Concept uses layers
to organize these objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in RAM Concept resides on one and only one layer. You
can handle all of the objects on a single layer as a group or individually.
RAM Concept
60
User Manual
Understanding Layers
Managing layers
This layer contains all the imported CAD drawing information. RAM Concept automatically stores any imported
drawings on this layer.
Mesh Input Layer
This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of the structure. RAM Concept uses these objects to
generate corresponding finite element objects on the Element Layer.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab Opening, Beam, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
Line Spring, Area Spring.
Element Layer
This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects can be generated by RAM Concept based on the
information on the Mesh Input Layer, or can be created by hand.
Layer-Specific Objects:Column Element, Wall Element, Slab Element, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
Line Spring, Area Spring.
Loading Layers (Self-dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temporary Construction (at Stressing), Other Dead, Live
(Reducible), Live (Unreducible), Live (Storage), Live (Roof) and User-defined)
These layers contain all the information that defines the loads on the structure. In RAM Concept , a loading is a
set of loads applied as a group, such as the live loads. The loading layers also contain the loading analysis results.
RAM Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic loading layers by default and you cannot delete
them.
You can define an unlimited number of loadings and RAM Concept creates a corresponding layer for each.
Layer-Specific Objects:Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead Loading Layer, Balance Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic
Loading Layer.
Pattern Layer
This layer contains the load patterns for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects:Load Patterns.
Design Strip Layer
This layer contains the design strips, design sections and punching checks for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects:Span Segments, Span Boundaries, Strip Boundaries, Design Sections, Punching Checks.
Tendon Parameters Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain high level post-tensioning objects. Although there are two tendon layers, Latitude and
Longitude, there is no requirement to use both layers. You can draw tendon parameters on the tendon
parameters layers in whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects:Banded Tendon Polyline, Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral, Tendon Void, Profile Polyline.
Manual Tendon Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons and jacks for the structure. Although there are two
tendon layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is no requirement to use both layers. You can draw tendons on the
tendon layers in whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects:Tendon, Jack.
RAM Concept
61
User Manual
Understanding Layers
Managing layers
Load Combination Layers (All Dead, Dead and Balance, Initial Service, Service, Sustained Service,
Factored and User-defined)
These layers contain the load combination analysis results.
Note: The load combinations listed are for ACI318. Other codes use some different terminology.
Rule Set Design Layers (Code Minimum, User Minimum, Initial Service, Service, Sustained Service,
Strength, Ductility)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design results.
Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, other codesuse some different terminology.
Load History Deflection Layers
These layers contain the results of the load history analyses.
Additional Mass Loading Layer
This layer contains loads that are converted to mass for the vibration analysis.
Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
Vibration Analysis Layer
This layer contains vibration related analysis results.
Layer-Specific Objects: Excitation Areas.
Design Status Layer
This layer contains the summary of all the design results. The summary information is automatically created by
RAM Concept when you Calc All. You cannot create, edit, or delete the objects on this layer but you can view
them.
RAM Concept
62
User Manual
Understanding Layers
Managing layers
Figure 3: Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following layers: Drawing Import, Mesh Input,
Element, Design Strip, Reinforcement, Design Status
RAM Concept
63
User Manual
RAM Concept
64
User Manual
1.
RAM Concept
65
User Manual
) magnify the
) diminishes the view. You can set the view to encompass the entire model by using Zoom
).
RAM Concept
66
User Manual
The view history operates much like the forward and backward buttons in a web browser. Each zoom or pan
action is added to the view history. The View Previous (
4.5.4 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs that invalidates the current view. When you generate
the mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM
Concept automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view is not up to date, click Redraw (
) to
regenerate the view in the active window.
RAM Concept
67
User Manual
RAM Concept
68
User Manual
RAM Concept
69
User Manual
RAM Concept
70
User Manual
) or Shrink Fonts (
).
Note: The temporary font size change only affects the active window and RAM Concept discards the change
when the window is closed.
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant size regardless of the plan scale. A non-zero value
scales the font to be the same relative size as you zoom in and out
RAM Concept
71
User Manual
RAM Concept
72
User Manual
Snap to Intersection (
Snap to Point (
polygon.
) snaps to any defined point such as the center of a column, end point of a line, or vertex of a
Snap Orthogonal ( ) snaps orthogonally in the direction of the grids local x- or y-axis. This need not be
parallel with the global x- and y-axes.
Snap to Perpendicular (
Snap to Center (
Snap to Grid (
Snap Extension (
snap settings.
In general, the snap extension setting causes the other snap calculations to behave as if the line segments
displayed extended to be infinitely long lines. The specific changes to the other snap settings are:
Intersection: intersections between infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable points.
RAM Concept
73
User Manual
Point: no effect.
End Point: no effect.
Mid Point: no effect.
Nearest: nearby infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
Orthogonal: no effect.
Perpendicular: perpendicular point on infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
Center: no effect.
Grid: no effect.
RAM Concept
74
User Manual
RAM Concept
75
User Manual
RAM Concept
76
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
77
User Manual
RAM Concept
78
User Manual
RAM Concept
) then click. (Hold down the <Shift> key as you click to move a copy of the selection.)
79
User Manual
).
).
RAM Concept
).
80
User Manual
RAM Concept
81
User Manual
).
Choose the Line tool (
2. Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
RAM Concept
82
User Manual
RAM Concept
83
User Manual
RAM Concept
84
User Manual
RAM Concept
85
User Manual
Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems: US, SI and MKS.
Some designers refer to the US units system as US customary units, and others call it Imperial. SI and MKS
are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather than weight.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice should dictate your choice.
The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example, after choosing the US system, one designer might use
the default area load units of pounds per square feet, and another might change the selection to kips per square
feet.
RAM Concept
86
User Manual
Choosing Units
Selecting units
RAM Concept
87
User Manual
Choosing Units
Selecting units
RAM Concept
88
User Manual
Choosing Units
Specifying report as zero
RAM Concept
89
User Manual
RAM Concept
90
User Manual
Figure 10: Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending, Element Axial, Vertical Deflection.
Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive x- and y-faces.
Element bending Tension bottom face.
Element axial Tension.
Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down).
Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face (equivalent to Positive x-shear on Positive y-face).
Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face (equivalent to negative y-axis moment on positive y-face).
Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions.
Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and y-axes.
Figure 11: Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).
RAM Concept
91
User Manual
RAM Concept
92
User Manual
RAM Concept
93
User Manual
RAM Concept
94
User Manual
RAM Concept
95
User Manual
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It usually describes the system, such as strand size and
bonding.
Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is usually comprised of seven wires then the area is
more complicated than d2/4.
RAM Concept
96
User Manual
RAM Concept
97
User Manual
RAM Concept
98
User Manual
RAM Concept
99
User Manual
10
Specifying loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a group.
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You draw the actual loads on the loading plans.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type, as described in About loading types below).
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and you define the factors that control this process in the
loading window.
RAM Concept
100
User Manual
Specifying loadings
Viewing the loadings
Different sets of live loads. See About loading types on page 102 for further description.
Snow Loading The snow loads on the structure.
Service Wind North Loading The set of wind loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Service Wind East Loading The set of wind loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic North Loading The set of seismic loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic East Loading The set of seismic loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
RAM Concept
101
User Manual
Specifying loadings
About loading types
Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal, Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
A Hyperstatic analysis is used for only the Hyperstatic Loading described in About default loadings.
For information on Lateral SE, see Self-equilibrium analysis in Chapter 50, Analysis Notes.
On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are located within the loading pattern when performing
pattern-loading calculations. See About load pattern for more information.
Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are not located within the loading pattern when
performing pattern-loading calculations.
Note: Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors are the same value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is
identical to setting both factors to 1.0
RAM Concept
102
User Manual
Specifying loadings
Available loading types
Live (Parking) Loadings of this type contain typical loads for parking garages or car parks.
Live (Roof) Loadings of this type contain typical roof live loads - except snow - that are reducible. RAM Concept
never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural System may reduce these loads).
Snow Loadings of this type contain typical snow loads. They generally do not consider drift or exceptional
circmstances, and they may be characteristic or design loads. See the specific code chapters for further details.
Other Loadings of this type contain loads of an unspecified nature. RAM Concept never considers these loadings
except in manually created or edited load combinations (or load combinations created in previous files). All
loading from Floor versions 2.3 and before, and RAM Concept versions 1.3 and before (except self-dead, balance
and hyperstatic) are given this type; it is often useful to change the loading types of these loadings from earlier
program versions.
Service Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at service force levels. Service Wind Loading N is
assumed to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it exists).
Ultimate Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Wind Loading N is
assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it exists).
Service Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at service force levels. Service Seismic Loading N
is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N (if it exists).
Ultimate Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Seismic
Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic Loading N (if it exists).
Most of these loading types are also available in a transfer variation. See About Transfer Loading Types for
more information.
Note: All loading types except self-weight, balance and hyperstatic may be used for more than one loading.
RAM Concept
103
User Manual
Specifying loadings
Changing Loading Types
RAM Concept
104
User Manual
Specifying loadings
About load pattern
RAM Concept
105
User Manual
Specifying loadings
About load pattern
RAM Concept
106
User Manual
Specifying loadings
About load pattern
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the on-pattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then
two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder
of the slab.
RAM Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with the full loading - to determine the design force
envelopes for design strip segments, design sections and punching checks.
RAM Concept
107
User Manual
Specifying loadings
About load pattern
When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should be 1.0. This results in no pattern loading.
See Chapter 21, Creating Pattern Loading, for further discussion.
RAM Concept
108
User Manual
11
RAM Concept
109
User Manual
RAM Concept
110
User Manual
RAM Concept
111
User Manual
RAM Concept
112
User Manual
Single
Lateral
RAM Concept
113
User Manual
Figure 17: This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads (shown). The live loading reduces the positive
span moment. By using an AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combination with a
reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
Conceptually, RAM Concept considers alternate envelope factors by analyzing the load combination 2L times
(where L is the number of loadings) - once for every permutation of load factors and alternate envelope factors
for all of the loadings. RAM Concept then envelopes the design strip forces, design section forces and punching
shear reactions for all of the load combination analyses. RAM Concept uses these force envelopes later for design
purposes. You can also plot the force envelopes or view them in tables.
RAM Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while considering the load factors.
Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as design forces by RAM Concept - such as standard slab
bending moments and deflections - are only stored for the load combination considering the standard load
factors.
As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope factors if you fully understand the principle involved. Do
not set them to zero without understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding
load factors.
RAM Concept
114
User Manual
Zero-tension
Single
Group
RAM Concept
115
User Manual
Figure 19: Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - six wind loadings have been added (and one stressing dead
and three live loadings have been deleted)
After adding and deleting some loadings, the load combinations have been rebuilt. See Rebuilding load
combinations.
The Rebuild operation adds the load combination Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f 1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 20: Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1 L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
RAM Concept now expands this load combination and calculates the following load combinations:
1. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) + 1.6 North Wind + 1.6 North Wind
(transfer)
2. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) - 1.6 North Wind - 1.6 North Wind
(transfer)
3. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) + 1.6 East Wind
4. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) - 1.6 East Wind
RAM Concept
116
User Manual
RAM Concept
117
User Manual
12
RAM Concept
118
User Manual
RAM Concept
119
User Manual
Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing, etc.) based upon geometry
rather than stress or moment level. Does not include shear reinforcement.
User Minimum
Design
Reinforcement based on user defined reinforcement ratio. See the design strip
property description in chapter 22.
Initial Service Design Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of prestress (when dead load is
minimal).
Service Design
Sustained Service
Design
Strength Design
Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending and shear for factored (or
ultimate) moments, and minimum shear reinforcement.
Ductility Design
Soil Bearing
This is used in mat foundation (raft) files to facilitate the enveloping of soil bearing
pressure. It does not use any active rules.
RAM Concept
120
User Manual
RAM Concept
121
User Manual
13
RAM Concept
122
User Manual
RAM Concept
123
User Manual
14
RAM Concept
124
User Manual
Figure 22: The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based upon the selections shown below.
Table 2: Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type, and the slab area imported.
Story
Import Type
Elevated
Mat Foundation
1st
2nd
RAM Concept
125
User Manual
Loading Type
Forces Imported
Mat
Transfer Gravity
Fz, Mx, My
Mat
Transfer Lateral
Elevated
Transfer Gravity
Fz
Elevated
Transfer Lateral
Fz, Mx, My
Wall forces are resolved into a statically equivalent linearly varying force applied along the length of the wall.
The following loads can be imported
1. Direct gravity loads
Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the imported slabs.
The following table shows how RSS load cases are mapped to RAM Concept loading layers.
Table 4: Mapping of RSS load cases
RSS Load Case
Dead
Dead Load
Live
Live Reducible
Live Reducible
RAM Concept
126
User Manual
Live Unreducible
Live Unreducible
Live Storage
Live Storage
Live Roof
Partition
Construction Dead
Construction Live
Ignored
Mass Dead
Ignored
RAM Concept
127
User Manual
RAM Concept
128
User Manual
RAM Concept
129
User Manual
RAM Concept
130
User Manual
RAM Concept
131
User Manual
Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g. beams, all entities of that category are removed from the
RAM Concept file before importing. For example, if beams are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for
import, then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected when the file is reimported.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL loads in reimported loading layers are removed. Any loads
you have added manually on a loading layer being reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to
regenerate load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport operation, because it may lead to loss of information. It
warns you if the data to be reimported would be significantly different from the previously imported data, or if
significant information will be lost. For example, RAM Concept warns you when reimporting a mat foundation
after previously importing an elevated slab, or vice versa.
RAM Concept
132
User Manual
A confirmation box appears that warns about differences from previously imported data.
4. Click Replace or Cancel.
A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a summary and any warnings.
5. Click OK.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
Beams
Surface elevation is 0.0.
RAM Concept
133
User Manual
14.6.3 Assumptions
All loads are applied to the surface of the slab.
Wall forces are applied as a linearly varying force along the length of the wall that is statically equivalent to
the wall forces and moments.
Refer to the following tables for mapping of RAM load cases and types to RAM Concept s loadings and force
levels.
Table 5: RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
RSS Load Type
Wind
Wind
Service *
Seismic
Seismic
Ultimate *
Other
Seismic
Ultimate *
Virtual
Ignored
Sub-Type
Wind
Wind
Service *
Wind
all others
Wind
Service
Seismic
Seismic
Ultimate *
RAM Concept
134
User Manual
Sub-Type
Seismic
UBC 94
Seismic
Service
Seismic
all others
Seismic
Ultimate
Dynamic
Eigen solution
Ignored
Dynamic
all others
Ignored
Seismic
Center of rigidity
Ignored
Virtual Work
Ignored
Ultimate *
New
Open
Close
Save As
Save Template
Strip Wizard
Sync ISM / New from Repository
All Sync RSS Operations
All Sync STAAD Operations
These restrictions are in place primarily to maintain the integrity of the Concept files when they are imbedded in
the RSS model file.
RAM Concept
135
User Manual
15
RAM Concept
136
User Manual
RAM Concept
137
User Manual
RAM Concept
138
User Manual
16
16.1.1 Purpose
There are two related purposes for ISM:
The transfer of structural information between applications.
The coordination of structural information between applications.
To provide for transferring information, ISM provides a means of defining, storing, reading and querying ISM
models.
To provide for coordination of information, ISM can detect differences between ISM models, allowing you to
selectively update either an ISM repository or an applications data. This gives you control over the consistency
between the two data sets.
RAM Concept
139
User Manual
RAM Concept
140
User Manual
RAM Concept
141
User Manual
3.
4.
5.
6.
Result
only the members within that substructure will be imported in the model
RAM Concept
142
User Manual
Result
select No Substructure
7. (Optional) Set the Open Structural Synchronizer checkbox to open the Structural Synchronizer update
dialog next.
Use this window for manual inspection and filtering of the items to be imported.
8. Click OK.
16.3.1 Filtering
The ISM model is very general. It can represent diverse structure types, such as buildings and bridges, and
material types like steel, wood, and concrete. RAM Concept filters out any part of the ISM repository that it does
not model or is not relevant. The Update operations use the filtered model to determine the context of the
changes to be applied.
For example, RAM Concept filters out all steel members. When RAM Concept updates the ISM repository, it does
not need to replicate steel members in the model. The Change Management deduces that RAM Concept is not
deleting the steel members because it never read them in.
The RAM Concept filter retains only the following objects from the ISM model:
The imported story information
Concrete slabs, footings and beams on the imported story
Concrete walls and columns that are connected to the slabs or beams retained
RAM Concept
143
User Manual
Static load cases and their loads that are applied to the slabs or beams retained
Concrete materials and curve member sections that are used by the members retained
Concentrated and area surface rebar in slabs
Layer parallel rebar inside and parallel to a beam
Rebar materials used by imported rebar
Straight, rectangular tie, and open U tie perpendicular rebar in slabs or inside and parallel to a beam
RAM Concept and ISM use slightly different terminology for structural members and loading types. The
following table is a cross-reference of RAM Concept and ISM type names.
Table 7: Concept and ISM Type Name Cross-Reference
RAM Concept Name
ISM Type(/Use)
N/A
Story
Concrete Mix
Concrete
Slab Area
Slab Opening
Surface Opening
Beam
Curve Member/Beam
Column
Curve Member/Column
Wall
Surface Member/Wall
Loading
Load Case
Point Load
Point Load
Line Load
Curve Load
Area Load
Surface Load
N/A
Section
RAM Concept
144
User Manual
ISM Type(/Use)
Rebar
Rebar Material
Concentrated Rebar
Distributed Rebar
Transverse Rebar
Perpendicular Rebar
RAM Concept
145
User Manual
Small Features
Changing the shape of a slab can sometimes introduce small features that are not detected until the model is
meshed. For example, the corner of a drop cap might extend slightly past the edge of the lowest priority slab.
When the lowest priority slab is extended to contain the drop cap, it may have a very small (< 50 mm) edge. The
Line too short (39.1.2) or Feature eliminated (39.1.3) warnings will be generated when meshing the model.
Removing these features will generally not hurt anything, but it is best to fix them manually in RAM Concept and
update the ISM repository to eliminate future warnings.
RAM Concept
146
User Manual
RAM Concept
147
User Manual
Solid Rectangle
Width
Height
Hollow Rectangle
Width
Height
Solid Circle
Outer Diameter
Outer Diameter
Hollow Circle
Diameter
Diameter
Web Thickness
Depth
Web Thickness
Depth
RAM Concept
148
User Manual
Thickness
Depth
Web Thickness
Depth
Double L
2Thickness
Depth
Double T
2Web Thickness
Depth
ISM also defines Custom, Built Up and Varying section shapes. ISM Custom sections are defined by an arbitrary
geometric shape. RAM Concept approximates Custom sections by a square of the same area. ISM Built Up
sections are composites of other parametric or custom sections. RAM Concept approximates Built Up sections by
a square with the area of the sum of the areas of the section's components.
ISM Varying sections vary shape linearly along a member. RAM Concept approximates a Varying section shape
by applying the rules for constant sections to the start of the first varying section segment.
When updating an ISM repository, RAM Concept section approximations will appear as changes in the Structural
Synchronizer update dialog. The Change action on these changes can be set to Always Reject to prevent the ISM
sections from being replaced.
DeadConstruction
Stressing Dead
DeadStructure
Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed
Other Dead
DeadUnspecified
Other Dead
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Floor Load Cause.
Table 10: Concept Floor Loading Types Imported
Ism Load Cause
FloorAssembly
Live Unreducible
RAM Concept
149
User Manual
FloorOffice
Live Reducible
FloorResidential
Live Reducible
FloorRetail
Live Reducible
FloorStorage
Live Storage
FloorUnspecified
Live Reducible
ParkingHeavy
Live Parking
ParkingLight
Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified
Live Parking
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Roof Load Cause
Table 11: Concept Roof Loading Types Imported
Ism Load Cause
RoofAccess
Live Roof
RoofRain
Live Roof
RoofSnowDrift
Snow
RoofSnowUniform
Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified
Snow
RoofUnspecified
Live Roof
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Lateral Load Cause.
Table 12: Concept Lateral Loading Types Imported
Ism Load Cause
SeismicService
Seismic Service
SeismicUltimate
Seismic Ultimate
SeismicUnspecified
Seismic Ultimate
RAM Concept
150
User Manual
WindService
Wind Service
WindUltimate
Wind Ultimate
WindUnspecified
Wind Service
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Other Load Cause.
Table 13: Concept Other Loading Types Imported
Ism Load Cause
EarthPressureService
Other
EarthPressureUltimate
Other
EarthPressureUnspecified
Other
FloorConstruction
Other
FluidContained
Other
FluidUncontained
Other
FluidUnspecified
Other
GroundWaterPressure
Other
Hydrodynamic
Other
Hydrostatic
Other
Ice
Other
Other
Other
PostTensioning
Balance
Settlement
Other
Shrinkage
Other
Thermal
Other
The following table defines the ISM Load Cause exported for each RAM Concept Loading Type.
RAM Concept
151
User Manual
Balance
PostTensioning
Stressing Dead
DeadConstruction
Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed
Live Reducible
FloorUnspecified
Live Unreducible
FloorAssembly
Live Storage
FloorStorage
Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified
Live Roof
RoofAccess
Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified
Other
Other
Wind Service
WindService
Wind Ultimate
WindUltimate
Seismic Service
SeismicService
Seismic Ultimate
SeismicUltimate
The Balance loading is not exported to ISM by default. It is not always useful to other programs, and it may
significantly increase the size of the ISM repository. See the Options section below for information on enabling
Balance loading export.
RAM Concept
152
User Manual
16.3.8 Rebar
Exporting RAM Concept Rebar to ISM
RAM Concept exports three types of rebar to ISM.
RAM Concept
153
User Manual
Required Properties
BarDirection
BarSpacing
BarCount
BarLength
LayoutDirection
LayoutPoint
HookLocalAxes
BarDirection
BarSpacing
LayoutBoundary
HookLocalAxes
LayoutPath
LayoutPath
ISM Anchor, Hook90, Hook180 and None (straight) rebar end types are supported. An Unset or Other hook type
is imported as straight. Hook135 is imported as a 90 degree hook. LapSplice, OffsetLapSplice, MechanicalSplice
and WeldedSplice are imported as anchors.
RAM Concept imports ISM Concentrated Surface Rebar and ISM Area Surface Rebar into RAM Concept as User
Concentrated and User Distributed rebar. ISM Layer Parallel Rebar that are in an imported beam are imported as
User Concentrated rebar.
RAM Concept
154
User Manual
Walls and columns in the ISM repository are updated only when this option is enabled.
This option is stored in the file; by default, support members are not updated. Support
members are always imported from the ISM repository to create or update the RAM
Concept model and are always exported when creating an ISM repository.
Export Balance
Loading
the Balance loading is exported to ISM only when this option is enabled. This option is
stored in the file. It is off by default, so the Balance loading is not exported
RAM Concept
155
User Manual
17
RAM Concept
156
User Manual
RAM Concept
157
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
158
User Manual
).
Choose the Wall tool (
2. Click at the wall end center points.
RAM Concept
159
User Manual
RAM Concept
160
User Manual
).
Related Links
Expanding tool buttons on page 58
RAM Concept
161
User Manual
RAM Concept
162
User Manual
).
Related Links
Expanding tool buttons on page 58
RAM Concept
163
User Manual
Figure 33: Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units at the first three corners. For quad areas,
Concept calculates the fourth corner value.
RAM Concept
164
User Manual
RAM Concept
165
User Manual
Figure 34: Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input Standard Plan
RAM Concept
166
User Manual
Figure 35: The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from the previous figure.
RAM Concept
167
User Manual
RAM Concept
168
User Manual
RAM Concept
).
169
User Manual
RAM Concept
170
User Manual
).
Choose the Beam tool (
2. Click at the each end of the beam centerline.
RAM Concept
171
User Manual
RAM Concept
172
User Manual
18
RAM Concept
173
User Manual
RAM Concept
174
User Manual
RAM Concept
175
User Manual
RAM Concept
176
User Manual
RAM Concept
177
User Manual
Figure 43: Point support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked.
Figure 44: Line support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked
RAM Concept
178
User Manual
Figure 45: Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementation of line supports to refine the mesh.
RAM Concept
179
User Manual
19
RAM Concept
180
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
181
User Manual
).
Choose the Wall Element tool (
2. Click at the wall end center points.
RAM Concept
182
User Manual
RAM Concept
183
User Manual
).
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point supports at slab element nodes.
To draw a point support
1.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line supports along the edge of the slab elements.
The ends of the line supports must be at slab element nodes. Line supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To drawing a line support on slab elements
1.
RAM Concept
).
184
User Manual
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point springs at slab element nodes.
To draw a point spring
1.
).
RAM Concept
185
User Manual
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line springs along the edge of the slab elements. The
ends of the line springs must be at slab element nodes. Line springs cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw a line spring
1.
).
Choose the Area Spring tool (
2. Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
RAM Concept
186
User Manual
RAM Concept
187
User Manual
). This
RAM Concept
188
User Manual
RAM Concept
) after drawing the mesh elements manually. It deletes all the elements that
189
User Manual
20
Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be
in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the moments can be about the global x- and y-axes.
Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading. You define each loading in the loadings window, and
draw the loads on plans.
There is no limitation to the number of loads defined.
Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have no effect on the automatic mesh generation. This is
satisfactory for most loads. For very heavy point or line loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the
loads should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You can do this by drawing pinned columns and walls
above the floor, and drawing the loads at these locations with the help of snaps. Alternatively, you can refine the
mesh locally with the use of dummy slab objects. Refer to Selectively refining the mesh for further
information.
Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending upon the elevation above the slab surface of the loads.
If a load is located at a slab surface step, RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in
determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point or line loads at steps.
Importing a CAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads.
RAM Concept
190
User Manual
Drawing Loads
Point load properties
).
Choose the Point Load tool (
2. Click at the load location (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
RAM Concept
191
User Manual
Drawing Loads
Drawing line loads
My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end.
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two
values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment). See the
following figure.
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite element node, you should consider locating very large
loads at element edges. Line loads must be completely located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if
you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs .
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply
the load at the slab centroid.
RAM Concept
).
192
User Manual
Drawing Loads
Area load properties
2. Click at the load end points (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
RAM Concept
193
User Manual
Drawing Loads
Drawing area loads
Figure 48: Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the first three vertices. Concept calculates the
values at all other vertices.
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to make the load oversize. RAM
Concept ignores any part of an area load that is not on a floor element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the
automatic printing and zooming bounds.
To draw an area load
1. Choose the Area Load tool ( ).
2. Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or clicking at the first vertex.
RAM Concept
194
User Manual
Drawing Loads
Copying loads
4. Edit the properties of the new load.
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simultaneously.
RAM Concept
195
User Manual
21
RAM Concept
196
User Manual
Figure 49: Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily produce the maximum negative moments,
but they will produce moments that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in most
situations.
RAM Concept
197
User Manual
RAM Concept
198
User Manual
Figure 50: To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this load pattern.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh
RAM Concept
199
User Manual
Figure 51: The point load and some additional area load will be included in the pattern loading.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh
RAM Concept
200
User Manual
Figure 52: With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and there will be less additional area load in the
pattern loading.
RAM Concept
201
User Manual
Figure 53: This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that closely resembles the load pattern.
RAM Concept
202
User Manual
RAM Concept
203
User Manual
22
RAM Concept
204
User Manual
RAM Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of each division, plus one at the end. The length of
each cross section equals the width of the design strip at that location.
RAM Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design strip cross section according to the cross
section trimming and inter cross section slope limit settings.
RAM Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination along the length of each design strip cross
section (and hence across the width of the design strip).
RAM Concept uses some properties of each span segment to determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, posttensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip.
RAM Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load combination integrals within a rule set. Other
span segment properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the actual code rule calculations. See Span
segment properties for more information.
RAM Concept
205
User Manual
Figure 55: Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span with cross sections visible.
Figure 56: Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross section of three design strips.
RAM Concept
206
User Manual
RAM Concept
207
User Manual
RAM Concept
208
User Manual
RAM Concept
209
User Manual
RAM Concept
210
User Manual
RAM Concept
211
User Manual
RAM Concept
212
User Manual
RAM Concept
213
User Manual
RAM Concept
214
User Manual
RAM Concept
215
User Manual
RAM Concept
216
User Manual
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There are, however, exceptions, such as a design strip used for
a pour strip to discriminate between PT and RC areas, or used for a span with user-defined reinforcement in
discrete locations.
or
Process > Generate Strips
Note: The Generate Strips command does not generate strips for any span segment with the Lock Generated
Strips checked. This is useful when you are satisfied with some, but not all, of the design strips.
Note: Each span segment can generate up to 3 strips: a center (column) strip, a left (middle) strip and a right
(middle) strip. Together, these three strips form the entire span strip.
RAM Concept
).
217
User Manual
Note: Boundaries with a span set of latitude (longitude) only affect latitude (longitude) span segment strips.
RAM Concept
218
User Manual
Figure 63: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure. One span has some illogical design strips
because the calculated span width is excessive.
Figure 64: Regenerated design strips after modification of span width with span boundaries (shown inside ellipses).
Figure 65: The same span segment strips with the cross sections oriented to ninety degrees. This did not require
manual span boundaries.
RAM Concept
219
User Manual
Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths. You can choose to accept the column strip widths
that RAM Concept calculates, or make some modifications.
Figure 67: Strips generated from the span segments in the previous figure.
RAM Concept
220
User Manual
Figure 68: Strip boundaries have made transitioning column strip widths
Note: The short span segments in the preceding figure have Column Strip Width Calc set to Manual
The following four figures show the use of strip boundaries to control the column strip width.
RAM Concept
221
User Manual
Figure 70: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure. One span (with gray shading) has illogical
span width and column strip width.
Figure 71: Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the column strip width is still a problem.
RAM Concept
222
User Manual
Figure 72: Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Short spans and cantilevers present problems for the design because RAM Concept will generate narrow column
strips.
Codes recommend that columns strips are no more than half the span in width. RAM Concept makes the
(commonly used) assumption that the equivalent length of a cantilever is 2L. The cantilever column strip width
is thus L. This can be quite narrow for short cantilevers.
RAM Concept
223
User Manual
Figure 74: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure.
Figure 75: Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
RAM Concept
224
User Manual
RAM Concept
225
User Manual
RAM Concept
226
User Manual
Figure 77: One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with zero shear core.
Figure 78: Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow shear core slivers often result in shear
reinforcement and design failure.
RAM Concept
227
User Manual
Figure 79: Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross section not in the shear core are a different
color.
RAM Concept
228
User Manual
Figure 80: Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right).
Figure 81: Beam rectangle trimming (left) and Slab Rectangle trimming (right) showing revised cross-sections.
The shear core is now the same as the cross section.
Beam Rectangle Vertical slices of the cross section are removed until the remaining portion is the maximum
height rectangle possible. This rectangle can be multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
elevations.
Slab Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with a uniform
top and bottom elevation, and a maximum width. If multiple maximum-width rectangles are possible, the
deepest on (maximum area) is used. The rectangle formed may actually be multiple separated rectangles with
the same top and bottom elevations.
T or L The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross
section with a uniform top elevation, and only two bottom elevations (flange bottom and web bottom). The Tees
and Els formed can be joined (such as double-tees) or separated. Rectangles are considered the same as
flangeless Tees.
Figure 82: Untrimmed beam showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right).
RAM Concept
229
User Manual
Figure 83: T or L trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
Inverted T or L Same as T or L, but with the flange on the bottom.
Max Shear Core The top and/or bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with the
maximum shear core area.
Figure 84: Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear core (right).
RAM Concept
230
User Manual
Figure 85: Max Shear Core trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
None - No (single) cross section trimming is performed.
The best trimming is usually T or L, but this assumes that the drop
cap cross-sectional area is smaller than the drop panel cross sectional
area.
Down-turned beams:
Up-turned beams:
After a Calc-All, you can view the actual cross-section perspectives. See Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections.
Related Links
Selecting cross section trimming on page 231
RAM Concept
231
User Manual
Figure 86: Elevation of thickened slab. It would be unrealistic to use a design depth of t2 at cross-section A-A.
Figure 87: Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
A slope limit of 0.0 will not allow any change between adjacent cross sections top elevations and bottom
elevations. This effectively trims all the cross sections in a span segment strip to have the same top and bottom
elevation.
In general, we do not recommend using a slope limit over 0.25.
Figure 88: Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the full depth for all cross-section design
RAM Concept
232
User Manual
Figure 89: Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
RAM Concept
233
User Manual
RAM Concept
234
User Manual
Figure 90: Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is zero so the cross sections (shown in
Figure ) are perpendicular to the span segment.
RAM Concept
235
User Manual
RAM Concept
236
User Manual
Figure 92: Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross
sections (shown in the following figure) are parallel to those of adjacent spans
RAM Concept
237
User Manual
RAM Concept
238
User Manual
Figure 94: A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the
longitude tendons.
RAM Concept
239
User Manual
Figure 95: Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular to the latitude tendons which are at the low
point. Due to the layout the strip collects a component of the longitude tendon which is at its high point. This
configuration may cause design issues.
RAM Concept
240
User Manual
RAM Concept
241
User Manual
RAM Concept
242
User Manual
Figure 98: Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.
RAM Concept
243
User Manual
RAM Concept
244
User Manual
Figure 100: Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
RAM Concept
245
User Manual
RAM Concept
246
User Manual
Figure 102: Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span Cross Section tool.
Full panel design strips for an irregular grid (ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)
RAM Concept
247
User Manual
RAM Concept
248
User Manual
RAM Concept
249
User Manual
Figure 105: Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.
RAM Concept
250
User Manual
RAM Concept
251
User Manual
Figure 107: Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
RAM Concept
252
User Manual
RAM Concept
253
User Manual
Figure 109: Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span Cross Section tool.
RAM Concept
254
User Manual
Figure 110: Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
RAM Concept
255
User Manual
RAM Concept
256
User Manual
23
RAM Concept
257
User Manual
The top concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore depths
for more information on this important issue.
Bottom Ignore
Depth
The bottom concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore
depths for more information on this important issue.
Tributary
Length
This creates a zone over which the reinforcement required by the design section must be
provided (development lengths, if required, are in addition to this zone).
The zone length on the right side of the design section is the smaller of these two values:
RAM Concept
258
User Manual
TributaryLength/2.0
(SpanRatio - 0.0) * SpanLength
The zone length on the left side of the design section is the smaller of these two values:
TributaryLength/2.0
(1.0 - SpanRatio) * SpanLength
The intent of the span-ratio-based limit is to restrain the reinforcement zone to within the
span, even if the design section is at the beginning or end of a span.
Note: The Visible Objects dialog can be used to show the reinforced zone to be outlined and
hatched. The region displayed also considers all the span ratio implications. The hatched
region does not display before a calc-all.
Span Ratio
Determines the location of the design section relative to supports and midspan.
Strip Type
(Eurocode 2
only)
CS Service
Design Type
(Eurocode 2
only)
The service design type for members defined as PT for the design strip.
The choices are:
Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as prescribed in TR43.
Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance with Eurocode 2 clause 7.2/7.3.
Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack Width design.
See Chapter 57, BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 (Eurocode 2) with TR43 Design for additional
information.
CS Crack Width The crack width limit w max to use when designing for Eurocode 2 clause 7.3. When Code is
Limit
selected the values in UK National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
(Eurocode 2
only)
RAM Concept
259
User Manual
Example 1
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems does not comply as a drop panel. That is, a
drop cap. You should ignore the incremental thickness of the drop cap below the slab. RAM Concept
then only uses the drop cap for punching checks.
RAM Concept
260
User Manual
Figure 114: Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flexure.
Example 2
A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an effective part of the concrete section. You
should enter an appropriate Top Ignore Depth value.
Example 3
A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of the concrete cannot be mobilized for
flexure. You should enter an appropriate Bottom Ignore Depth value.
The following figure shows bending moments in a slab perpendicular to a beam. For such an
arrangement you need to decide if the slab should be designed for the bending moment at the face of
the beam, or within the beam.
RAM Concept
261
User Manual
Figure 117: Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
RAM Concept
262
User Manual
Figure 118: Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for slab bending. Ignore depth
should be used for the design sections to utilize a shallower section.
RAM Concept
263
User Manual
24
24.2.1 General
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations.
The analysis is conservative when you set a very large radius, but this has two detrimental effects: RAM Concept
will need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer to check that punching location. More
importantly, RAM Concept will consider slab openings that are far from the column in determining the
potentially critical section that may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from the slab depth in each region to determine the effective
depth for critical section calculations.
For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. RAM Concept
subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d distance.
If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified Cover to CGS, the region is treated as a hole.
RAM Concept
264
User Manual
RAM Concept
265
User Manual
RAM Concept
This option provides a supplemental maximum stress limit on the basic control
perimeters as suggested in the paper Effectiveness of punching shear reinforcement to
EN 1992-1-1:2004 in The Structural Engineer 87 (10) May 2009.
266
User Manual
For specification of 1 for equation 6.47. You should calculate the input value using the
equation in clause 6.4.4 of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 code. This value is only used if the
Auto Calc Reinforcement Ration option is not specified.
Auto-Calc
Reinforcement
Ratio
Automatically calculate the value used in equation 6.47 using the user reinforcement
on the specified face. Program reinforcement is not used in this calculation. See the notes
on auto calculation of 1 on page 1104 .
Bar Location
Specifies the user bar location (top or bottom) to use in the auto calculation of
reinforcement ratio.
Beta Factor
This represents a ratio of the maximum stress on a critical section (including shear and
moment transfer) over the maximum stress due to shear only. This option allows the
user to select Auto Calc, 1.15 (interior), 1.4 (edge), 1.5 (corner), or input any positive
value for Beta directly.
The factors for each column condition are taken from clause 6.4.3 (6) of the EN
1992-1-1:2004 Code and are meant to be used only when lateral stability does not
depend upon frame action and where adjacent spans do not differ in length by more
than 25%.
Auto Calc uses the model and calculation methods described in Chapter 66, Punching
Shear Design Notes on page 1087 .
RAM Concept
267
User Manual
25
RAM Concept
268
User Manual
RAM Concept
269
User Manual
Straight:
90 Hook:
180 Hook:
Anchored:
RAM Concept
270
User Manual
Note: Special Caution - Reinforcement set to Auto face will not appear on either the top or the bottom
reinforcement plans. If you use Auto face reinforcement, change the default plan settings (or add some plans)
to be certain that all of the reinforcement used is visible on the plans in your report.
Bar Type The label used to identify the reinforcing bar. The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement
bar labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria > Materials .
Bar Extent Skew The orientation of the bars extent line in degrees (concentrated reinforcement only - see The
Skew Reinforcement Extent tool for more information).
Quantity Type The choices are:
Quantity: number of bars
Spacing: bar spacing
Number of bars Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Quantity
Spacing Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Spacing.
Orientation The plan angle of the reinforcement (distributed reinforcement only - see The Orient
Reinforcement tool for more information).
Zone Width The width of the concentrated reinforcement zone.
Designed By The choices are:
User: Bars drawn by the user
Program: Bars calculated and drawn by RAM Concept .
Note: See Concentrated and distributed reinforcement callouts for discussion on the second (Presentation) tab.
Related Links
The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool on page 283
The Orient Reinforcement tool on page 282
RAM Concept
271
User Manual
Number of
Legs
Spacing
Control
If the length/spacing are not in equal increments, this controls which is the independent
property (that remains fixed) and which is the dependant property (that gets adjusted). The
choices are:
Length Fixed: The length remains fixed, and the input spacing is taken as a maximum
spacing and adjusted down to create an equal number of spaces.
Spacing Fixed: the spacing remains fixed, and the input length is adjusted up to an equal
increment of the input spacing. The length is always adjusted at the end of the transverse
rebar object, and the start point remains fixed.
Length
Spacing
The specified spacing between the transverse reinforcement along the region.
RAM Concept
272
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
).
273
User Manual
).
Note: This creates two reinforcement objects: one that belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and one that
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: See Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two directions for more information.
RAM Concept
274
User Manual
).
You can use the stretch tool to edit the length and location of the region, or change the length and/or spacing
properties. The transverse reinforcement line segment must intersect any shear cores in cross sections you want
to reinforce. The size, shape, and orientation of the transverse reinforcement take on the size and shape of the
containing shear core.
RAM Concept
275
User Manual
Figure 122: Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the first Concentrated
Reinforcement tool.
RAM Concept
276
User Manual
25.8.2
Figure 123: Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the second Concentrated
Reinforcement tool.
25.8.3
Figure 124: Concentrated bars in two directions drawn by clicking at points A and B with the
Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool.
RAM Concept
277
User Manual
25.8.4
Figure 125: Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by clicking at 5 vertices with the
Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 126: Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept
278
User Manual
25.8.5
Figure 127: Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the
Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 128: Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept
279
User Manual
25.8.6
Figure 129: Distributed bottom mat polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the
Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 130: Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept
280
User Manual
Figure 131: Two scenarios of user transverse reinforcement, both resulting in individual bars that are coplanar to
the cross sections that the line segment intersects.
Figure 132: Resulting individual transverse bars when with no cross section trimming
RAM Concept
281
User Manual
Figure 133: Resulting individual bars when cross section trimming is set to Slab Rectangle
Note: Use snap orthogonal or snap to perpendicular to help with orientation where appropriate
Note: Selecting both reinforcement objects created with the Concentrated Rebar Cross tool or the Distributed
Rebar Cross in Perimeter tool orientates both reinforcement objects.
Note: See Orientating concentrated reinforcement for more information.
RAM Concept
282
User Manual
RAM Concept
283
User Manual
Figure 134: Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired orientation
RAM Concept
284
User Manual
Figure 136: Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 137: The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line parallel to line AB.
RAM Concept
285
User Manual
Figure 138: Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated reinforcement parallelogram
RAM Concept
286
User Manual
Figure 140: Use the auto hook tool to apply hooks to all four concentrated bar callouts
Figure 141: Hooks applied and bars extended to the slab edge
RAM Concept
287
User Manual
RAM Concept
288
User Manual
RAM Concept
289
User Manual
The transverse reinforcement format specifiers use the following key values:
$B - Bar name
$S - Spacing
$N - Number of spaces
$L - Number of legs (and shape)
$U - Spacing units
\n - Start a new line
$R - Rail quantity
$S - Studs per rail
$F - First stud spacing
$T - Typical stud spacing
$N - SSR system name
$U - Stud spacing units
$S - Stud spacing
\n - Start new line
RAM Concept
290
User Manual
RAM Concept
291
User Manual
26
Defining Tendons
Note: You could bypass this chapter if you are designing a structure with only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is
particularly true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on strength, deflection and crack control
rather than hypothetical service stresses.
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT
solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a
design criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in that direction. Some computer generated
tendon layouts are not practical for real design.
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and
loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this extremely difficult in 3D.
Thus, in RAM Concept , it is necessary for you to define the tendons by generating or drawing them in plan and
specifying parameters such as profile and number of strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following
for your first estimate:
your experience
a preliminary run with Strip Wizard
a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A) considerations
a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag incorrect guesses, and you can use The Auditor for help
in iterating)
RAM Concept
292
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Layer
always necessary for real tendons to match RAM Concept tendon exactly. For example, it is common practice
in monostrand to group tendons together in the field. For this situation, it is usually convenient to specify the
total number of strands in the group in a single RAM Concept tendon. In this case the correct number of ducts
can still be calculated correctly using the input duct properties.
RAM Concept
293
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Layer
RAM Concept
294
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Layer
RAM Concept
295
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Layer
Spacing
Width
Tendon Spacing Defines the lateral spacing between generated tendons.
Layout Width For banded tendon polylines, defines the total width of the generated tendon layout when
width is selected for Layout Type. The width includes a half space on each side of the outermost generated
tendons.
Tendon Type For banded tendon polylines, defines the behavior of the banded tendon polyline and the
properties of the generated tendon. The choices are:
Primary
Added
Added Tendon Generation For banded tendon polylines, controls the behavior of the automatic generation of
added tendons to balance forces at connected banded tendon polyline ends. The choices are:
None
Fixed Length
Span Fraction
Added Tendon Length For banded tendon polylines when Fixed Length is selected for Added Tendon
Generation, controls the length of the automatically generated banded tendon polyline.
Added Tendon Span Fraction For banded tendon polylines when Span Fraction is selected for Added
Tendon Generation, controls the length of the automatically generated banded tendon polyline as a function of
the span containing the joint that the added tendon is attached.
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the
size and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT system properties. It is possible to mix
systems in a single tendon parameters layer.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon
curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of
0.2 places the inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at midspan. This is a commonly
used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple parabola.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile).
RAM Concept
296
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon properties
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and bottom cover to the CGS of the strands. Future versions
will allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and bottom cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded tendons duct.
Elevation Reference The choices are:
Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for very complicated
geometry.
Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
almost always negative.
Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is always
positive.
Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
always positive.
Profile Location Determines the orientations of the created tendon half-spans (and the corresponding inflection
point location). The choices are:
Support
Span
The support profile polylines are displayed graphically as solid lines on plan, while the span polylines are
displayed as dashed lines.
)) to edit its
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon drawing tool sets properties for all the tendon drawing tools.
The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties:
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the
size and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT system properties. It is possible to mix
systems in a single tendon layer.
Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in the selected tendon(s). It need not be an integer value.
While the total number of strands in RAM Concept and the real structure must match, the grouping of strands
into tendons need not be the same in RAM Concept as in the real structure. It is usually not necessary to model
each real tendon as a RAM Concept tendon - fewer RAM Concept tendons (with a larger number of strands per
tendon) are often used. An exception is for specific code rules that require a deduction in shear area for duct
size. In those situations you should specify the correct duct size and number of strands per tendon.
For example, if you model six 4-strand ducts containing 2 strands each, as three 4-strand ducts containing 4
strands each, RAM Concept considers the correct number of strands (12), but only three of the six ducts.
RAM Concept
297
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon properties
Elevation (Elevation Value at end 1 and Elevation Value at end 2) The vertical distance from the elevation
reference to the centroid of the tendons strands, also referred to as CGS (center of gravity of strand).
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and bottom cover to the CGS of the strands. Future versions
will allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and bottom cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded tendons duct.
Elevation Reference The choices are:
Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for very complicated
geometry.
Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
almost always negative.
Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is always
positive.
Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
always positive.
The dimension from the elevation reference (at that exact plan location) to the CGS is the Elevation Value. Thus,
if a profile point is located over a slab thickening (drop cap, beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into
account if the elevation reference refers to the changing surface. RAM Concept does not currently use
dimensions to underside of duct, or cover, to determine elevation values. Future versions will incorporate this
calculation.
The path of a tendon along with the number of strands determines the forces the tendon exerts on the concrete.
Profile points (that are usually the tendon high and low points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce
intermediate profile points.
Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors, each segment has a high point (end 1) and a low point
(end 2). For mats, the reverse is generally true. Each segment can represent a half of a span, or a partial half
span.
Most user defined spans have a tendon with two segments. Cantilevers and some user defined spans have
tendons with one segment.
Selections for Elevation Value and Elevation Reference should consider cover and load balancing. Profiles
typically vary according to span lengths.
Note: Profile values displayed in RAM Concept are always from the soffit. When structure and/or tendon
changes are made, the profile values can be temporarily out of date and incorrect. In order to update the profile
values, use the Generate Tendons command or run a Calc All.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon
curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of
0.2 places the inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at midspan. This is a commonly
used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple parabola.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile).
RAM Concept
298
User Manual
Defining Tendons
About creating tendons
Half Span Ratio (Half Span Ratio End 1 and Half Span Ratio End 2) Specifies the portion of the half span that
this segment represents. The end 2 half span ratio must always be greater than the end 1 half span ratio. Half
span ratios of 0 and 1 represent an entire half span. It is not recommended that these values be changed by the
user.
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads If two entire half span tendon segments in a single span have
different values for end 1 then the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option moves the low point in
plan to equilibrate the uplift during an analysis calculation.
Note: Do not select this option if the half span ratios of both tendon segments are not 0 and 1 or if the profile
values are at the same elevation. A segment with such profiles would have zero uplift and so the formulation
does not work.
RAM Concept
299
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing banded tendon polylines
).
Choose the Banded Tendon Polyline tool (
Click at the tendon polyline start point.
Click the next tendon polyline point (can be drawn across multiple spans or partial spans).
Continue to click tendon polyline points until all are defined.
Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
Note: Banded tendon polylines can be connected at their end points to single or multiple other banded tendon
polylines. However, it is an error to define banded tendon polylines that overlap.
RAM Concept
300
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Note: Distributed tendon quadrilaterals with common spacing, PT System, inflection point ratio, and harped
property can be drawn overlapping and RAM Concept will consider the cumulative force/strands in overlapping
regions.
RAM Concept
301
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals
26.7.2 Defining profile polylines using the Generate Profile Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate profile polylines automatically using span segments that have already been
defined on the design strip layer. Support polylines are generated from existing span segments. Latitude tendon
support polylines are generated from longitude span segments and vice-versa. Span polylines are created from
the support polylines created in the first step of the operation. If no span segments are drawn on the
corresponding layer then no profile polylines will be created.
To generate profile polylines
1.
Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool (
).
2. Select the span set to generate profile polylines for. Generally you will select the layer in the prestressing
folder you are currently working in.
3. To generate support polylines from the span segments, check the generate support polylines box and set
the elevation reference and elevation desired for the generated support polylines.
4. If support polylines are generated, to generate span polylines check the generate span polylines box and set
the elevation reference and elevation desired for the generated span polylines. If the tendon span angle is
consistent throughout the floor then set it in the Span Orientation Angle box. This will generate the span
polylines in the specified direction between the generated support polylines. If there is more than one span
orientation angle in the floor then Use Medial Axis can be selected. The Use Medial Axis option will generate
span polylines that are equidistant from the generated support polylines. For a single spanning direction, the
best results will normally be achieved by setting this angle.
RAM Concept
302
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Other tendon parameter plan objects and tools
26.7.3 Defining span polylines using the Generate Span Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate span polylines automatically using support polylines that have been previously
generated.
To generate profile polylines
1.
Select the support polylines that you want span polylines generated between (
).
2.
Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool (
).
3. Set the elevation reference, elevation, and span orientation angle for the generated span polylines.
4. Set the span ratio for the generated span polylines. This is the desired span control point. For a profile
control point at mid-span, set this value to 0.5.
RAM Concept
303
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing examples
RAM Concept
304
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting
Figure 149: Banded tendon polylines drawn by clicking on points A,B,C,D,E in sequence with Banded Tendon
Polyline tool.
Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Figure 150: Three distributed tendon quadrilaterals drawn by clicking on points A-D with distributed tendon
quadrilateral tool.
RAM Concept
305
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting
$F - force/width
$f - force/width units
$N - number of strands
$n - number of strands/width units
$P - PT system name
$I - inflection point ratio
$S - spacing
$s - spacing units
$A - angle and units
\n - new line
RAM Concept
306
User Manual
Defining Tendons
About drawing individual tendons
Profile Points - displays the profile control point information for the banded tendon polyline. The profile
values are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of the strands. In addition to the profile points
where the main tendon intersects profile polylines, the following additional points are provided to describe
the distributed tendon profiles:
Edges - profiles at the edge of the distributed tendon quadrilaterals or slab edges.
Span Changes - profiles at drastic changes in span profiles.
Concrete Elevation Changes - profile changes where the concrete reference plane changes such as beams
or drop caps.
Profile Polyline Ends - profiles at the ends of profile polylines
The intent is that with all these points displayed the profiling of all tendons within the distributed tendon
quadrilateral are defined by connecting support and span profile points. Profile points are not displayed at slab
edges where no profile polylines are used.
Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of the distributed tendon quadrilateral main tendon.
Choices are:
None
Stressing End
Dead End
Break
Symbol @ Extent Ends - displays the symbol at the end of the distributed tendon quadrilateral extent line.
Choices are:
None
Arrow
A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon tool (typically used for cantilevers).
A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon tool.
A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon Polyline tool.
A number of tendons one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon Panel tool.
A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon Panel tool.
You use these tools in different situations. You might find drawing one tendon and then copying it is quicker
than using the polyline and panel tools.
RAM Concept
307
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
).
Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when drawing half-span tendons because the tool measures
the inflection point from the high point (end 1).
) allows you to draw a series of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
1.
RAM Concept
308
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points sequentially in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
manner to form a quadrilateral.
Figure 151: Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
RAM Concept
309
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
Figure 152:
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto Connect.
Fixed draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons.
Equal (not to exceed maximum) draws tendons an equal distance apart that is at most the spacing value.
Auto connect (based on last edge) draws tendons connected to the profile points on the last edge of the tendon
panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge tendons.
RAM Concept
310
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
RAM Concept
311
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
RAM Concept
312
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Editing tendons
3. Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the tendon panel area (following a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction).
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4. Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the midpoint of each tendon.
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals that may crack the slab. For this and other reasons, it
is a good idea to have the amount of uplift or load balance somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift
1. Select a tendon segment.
2.
Click the Calc Profile tool (
).The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance
load.
3. Input the desired balance load (values are typically negative) in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click
Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift. You can select two segments in the same span and
RAM Concept calculates the low point based on average uplift. It is generally not necessary to balance exactly the
same amount of load in each span. It is not advisable to have an excessive number of different low points.
Manually rounding the profile values can produce a more practical design.
If the desired balance load is too high then RAM Concept could calculate a negative profile that causes an error
when calculating the results.
Note: RAM Concept does not check cover violations
RAM Concept
313
User Manual
Defining Tendons
About jacks
1. Open a plan from the Latitude Tendon or Longitude Tendon layer.
2. Choose Tools > Change Profiles.
The Change Tendon Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Enter the profile value that you wish to change.
4. Enter the new profile value.
5. Uncheck either tendon layer that you do not want edited.
6. Uncheck either end number that you do not want edited, and click OK.
RAM Concept
314
User Manual
Defining Tendons
Drawing the jacks
RAM Concept
315
User Manual
27
RAM Concept
316
User Manual
RAM Concept
317
User Manual
RAM Concept
318
User Manual
RAM Concept
319
User Manual
28
Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as
elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection) or wait until modeling is close to finished.
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It
makes sense, however, to run the file during modeling to check for errors. That way you could avoid repeating
the same modeling error.
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error messages when calculating results. If the file runs
successfully without errors, the Calc All icon becomes grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not
become grayed-out. See About analysis errors for more information.
Related Links
About analysis errors on page 328
or
Select Process > Calc Partial
RAM Concept
320
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
Calculations are performed up to and including the global slab analysis (slab moments
deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces.
Through design RAM Concept performs the design of strips, sections and punching shear checks, in addition
to all the Through analysis calculations.
Through layout RAM Concept performs the layout of program reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in
addition to all the Through design calculations.
All
RAM Concept performs the detailing of program reinforcement into individual bars
(viewable in perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout calculations.
The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog window provide options on how RAM Concept performs the
calculations. The options are:
Skip warnings
Optional warnings do not stop the calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc
Log. This setting is off by default.
Existing calculation results are not replaced by new calculations unless RAM Concept
detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This setting is on by default.
Warnings invalidate
calculations
RAM Concept
321
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
2. Choose the General tab.
RAM Concept
322
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
Include tendon component in punch check reaction This includes the vertical component of the tendon force
within the punch zone (which often reduces the punch check reaction). See Contribution from the Vertical
Component of Prestress in Chapter 66, Punching Shear Design Notes for more information.
Check capacity of long. user reinf. without designing additional program reinf. This option instructs RAM
Concept to perform a check of the existing defined longitudinal user reinforcement and post-tensioning and
report any failed locations. Since RAM Concept does not currently have user defined transverse (shear)
reinforcement, RAM Concept always performs a transverse shear (and SSR design for punching shear) design for
the given longitudinal reinforcement. When a calc all is run using this option, any program reinforcement will
be deleted before the start of the analysis and no additional program reinforcement will be designed.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
Iterations to use The number of iterations used in calculations. The higher the number of iterations, the closer
the tension is to zero.
Accelerator Power The power in the above formula; typically this is 1.
Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.
RAM Concept
323
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
RAM Concept
324
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
=
=
the concrete design creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM
Concept files adopt this value as a default.
BSR
Cccs
RAM Concept
=
=
325
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
See Section Design Notes on page 768 for further explanation.
Creep factor, kc
As defined above. See Load History Deflections on page 1080 for additional information.
Shrinkage strain The design shrinkage value used to determine long-term curvature in cross sections. See
Load History Deflections on page 1080 for additional information.
The time of application of the initial loads. This becomes the start time of the first load
history step specified in the Load History Criteria page.
Moist Cure
Duration
The duration of the moist cure period. This is used in the calculation of shrinkage strains.
Convergence
Tolerance
Ageing Coefficient
The coefficient that accounts for various behaviors in the calculation of sustained loads.
See Load History Deflections on page 1080 for additional information.
Shrinkage
Restraint %
Iterations to Use
Accelerator factor
A value that determines how much weight to give newly calculated curvatures in an
iteration compared to the average curvatures from the previous iteration. A value of 1.0
indicates to give the newly calculated curvature equal weight as the previous average
curvature. A value of greater than 1.0 will give the newly calculated curvature more
weight than the previous average curvature.
RAM Concept
326
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating the results
RAM Concept
327
User Manual
Calculating Results
About analysis errors
Simplifed (fast) calculation This analysis uses a fast calculation technique that is generally suitable for day to
day design where RMS velocity values are not required.
Modal Analysis This analysis uses a comprehensive dynamic modal superposition analysis which is suitable for
structures that are vibrationally sensitive or if RMS velocity values are required.
Simplifed (fast) calculation This analysis uses a fast calculation technique that is generally suitable for day to
day design where RMS velocity values are not required.
Duration, Time Increment Defines the number of time points that are used to calculate the modal analysis. The
duration should generally be set to capture at least 30 cycles of forcing and the time increment should be set to
at least 10 times shorter than the 4th harmonic of the fastest walking frequency.
Weight of Person The static weight of the person walking.
Simplifed (fast) calculation This analysis uses a fast calculation technique that is generally suitable for day to
day design where RMS velocity values are not required.
Max natural frequency Defines the maximum natural frequency that is used in the dynamic analysis for the
resonant response.
All nodes Will consider excitation at every node.
Critical Nodes Will consider excitation only at nodes where the expected response factor is greater than or
equal to the Excitation Response Factor Threshold.
Excitation Response Factor Threshold When considering Critical Nodes, the threshold value of interest.
All DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at every DOF at every node for the Modal Analysis (not
recommended).
Vertical DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at every node, but only for vertical DOF.
Vertical DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response only at the excited nodes.
RAM Concept
328
User Manual
Calculating Results
Calculating load history deflections
28.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All (
) to run a new analysis calculation. If the Calc All option is grayed-out (
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point where the information is no longer valid. For example, if
you were to add a load, it would not affect the stiffness matrix. The recalculation would start with the analysis of
loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the concrete elements however, the calculation would start
from the beginning.
If any calculations are out of date at the time, a Calc All will effectively be performed prior to calculating the
Load History Deflections.
RAM Concept
329
User Manual
Calculating Results
Decreasing calculation time
RAM Concept
330
User Manual
Calculating Results
Decreasing calculation time
28.7.2
Load History Deflections
Load history deflection calculation time is affected significantly by the number of cross sections and the
convergence tolerance/iterations to use. Calculation time can be reduced by reducing the number of cross
sections or increasing the convergence tolerance and/or reducing the iterations to use.
RAM Concept
331
User Manual
29
Loading
Load Combination
Rule Set Design
Vibrations
Design Status
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans,
perspectives and text tables that show those results. For example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on
the Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the Service LC layer.
reinforcement quantities
status
deflections
support reactions
precompression
load balance
bending moment contours
section stresses (for some codes)
punching shear
bearing pressures
RAM Concept
332
User Manual
To view reinforcement
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
If this plan shows more information than you require, consider using an alternate plan such as the Longitude
Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
RAM Concept
333
User Manual
RAM Concept
334
User Manual
RAM Concept
335
User Manual
RAM Concept
336
User Manual
RAM Concept
337
User Manual
RAM Concept
338
User Manual
).
Choose View > Plot (
The Plot dialog box appears.
Select the Section Analysis tab.
Check Active.
Keep the Value as Bending Moment
Uncheck Maximum Capacity and Minimum Capacity.
Click OK.
Note: You can select specific frame numbers in the dialog box. This could be used to show a plot
for, say, a single beam.
Note: You can selectively turn off left, middle and right strips. Left and right are the half
middle strips. Center is the column strip.
RAM Concept
339
User Manual
RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan to the name and prepends the layer name.
Select the Service LC layer, and click OK.
The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
Click OK.
Choose View > Plot (
).
The Plot dialog box appears.
Select the Reaction tab.
Check Active.
Select Standard.
Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to view reactions.
Related Links
Creating new plans on page 64
Creating new perspectives on page 65
tool (
), Axial Force Distribution tool (
) and Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). These plots display
predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab. RAM Concept bases these predictions on the
calculated results of the individual elements.
RAM Concept s calculation method guarantees that the results for design strip segments and design sections are
in equilibrium with the nodal loads. The results for plots across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and
can be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with high aspect ratios. Even though RAM Concept 's
calculation method guarantees stored elastic energy of the stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the
loads applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements (such as pointy triangles), the energy formulation
can result in local fictitious stress spikes. Note that this limitation does not affect design strip segments or design
sections and does not affect RAM Concept s reinforcement calculations.
RAM Concept
340
User Manual
RAM Concept
341
User Manual
RAM Concept
342
User Manual
) dialog box.
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why you should always use design strips and design
sections to determine design quantities.
RAM Concept
343
User Manual
29.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values across any line draw on the structure.
These distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure, but you should not use
them for quantitative design purposes. You should always use design strips and design sections to determine
design quantities.
number of bars
bar type (as defined as a design strip property)
length of the bars
bar spacing
The reinforcement shown on the Rule Set Designs and Design Status layers represents what is required in
addition to any specified user reinforcement and does not include development length considerations. For a
complete consideration of all parameters including development length refer to the Reinforcement Layer.
The following two figures show top reinforcement at a column. There are two callouts because the design strips
terminate at the column. The required reinforcement is different on each side, as often happens. You need to
rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical manner. The left hand reinforcement is nine #5 bars,
each 6.5 ft. long [nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long].
Figure 163: Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
RAM Concept
344
User Manual
RAM Concept
345
User Manual
Figure 168: Design Status: Shear Reinforcement Plan (US and metric units).
RAM Concept
346
User Manual
Note: The rules are applied to EC2 sections before the corners are filleted.
RAM Concept
347
User Manual
30
Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The default file setup has specific plot
settings for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize these settings or create new plans and
perspectives that show your desired plots.
Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is accessed through the Plot command (
).
30.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to display and control various slab analysis plot quantities
such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or inplane shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value. Other plot values are not dependent upon depth.
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element
by element, which can make it difficult to observe the results of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities,
nothing will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM Concept allows you to define a resolution for the
selected plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen regeneration times.
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the contour lines by unchecking Use default magnitudes
and entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots, you can set the upper and lower limits of the
contour values by entering the minimum and maximum values.
RAM Concept
348
User Manual
Plotting Results
Slab
Slab plots are available for loading, load combination and rule set layers.
Figure 169: The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
The Animation Control is described in more detail in the section, Plotting Results.
RAM Concept
349
User Manual
Plotting Results
Slab
While the meaning of the Standard, Max and Min contexts is somewhat self-evident, the following table lists how
RAM Concept calculates these values considering load patterns and standard and alternate load factors.
Standard
Loading
Single
Linear combination of
Loading Standard values
using the Standard load
factors
Load Combination
RAM Concept
Max
350
Min
User Manual
Plotting Results
Reaction
Layer Type
Standard
Max
Min
Lateral Group
(not available)
Load Combination
Rule Set
(not available)
30.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to display and control analysis reaction quantities.
Selecting the Standard context button displays reactions corresponding to the standard results (more
information about standard and enveloping results is available in Chapter 50, Analysis Notes). For the
standard results, you can display any number of reactions for column above/below, wall above/below, point
spring/support, line spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the punching checks. If a column above
and below occur at the same location in plan, and both Column Above and Column Below boxes are checked, the
sum of the reactions is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls above and below.
The other buttons in the Context group are for the enveloped results. RAM Concept displays reactions for
columns (above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result of the selected context. Wall reactions will
be enveloped and available for plotting in future versions.
The standard reaction context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the six
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
RAM Concept
351
User Manual
Plotting Results
Reaction
RAM Concept
352
User Manual
Plotting Results
Reaction
RAM Concept
353
User Manual
Plotting Results
Strip
30.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to display analysis results for the design strips. Each plot
value represents the variation of the selected value at each design strip segment cross section (along the axis of
each strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum moments and shears can be displayed, enabling
the envelope for a particular plot value to be displayed.
RAM Concept
354
User Manual
Plotting Results
Strip
The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the design strip segment, in equilibrium with the element
nodal forces.
The Twist value is the component of the torsion due to the slab twisting moment (Mxy for design strips parallel
to the x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress predictions (and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the
element nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use in torsion design.
Absolute Twist is the sum of the absolute value of the twist along the cross section. This value differs from the
Twist value in that it is always positive, and that in its calculation, twist values of different signs do not cancel
out.
The Absolute Twist value is not used in design unless Wood-Armer torsion design is selected.
Note: The accuracy of the Twist and Absolute Twist values are determined from element stress predictions and
are dependent upon the quality and the refinement of the mesh. Unlike the Torsion value, there is no guarantee
that these values will be in equilibrium with the applied nodal loads.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 50, Analysis Notes.
The standard strip context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the four
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
RAM Concept
355
User Manual
Plotting Results
Section Analysis
RAM Concept
356
User Manual
Plotting Results
Section Design
Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design layers.
RAM Concept
357
User Manual
Plotting Results
Section Design
The Top Developed and Bottom Developed values represent the amount of fully developed top and bottom
reinforcement that is required at each location.
Section design plots are only available for rule set designs and the design status layers.
RAM Concept
358
User Manual
Plotting Results
Section Design
With Span Detailing
Without Span Detailing, and
User Provided Reinf.
Span detailing is explained in Section 53.1 in Chapter 53, Reinforcement Notes.
The effects of the Span Detailing Contexts on plots are explained in the following two tables.
For the Design Status layer, the context of With Span Detailing includes the effects of the assumed
reinforcement development calculations in the plots of developed reinforcement.
User provided
reinforcement
Top
Vector component of
developed area of user
individual bars
intersected by the cross
sections
(none)
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Top Dev
Bottom Dev
Shear
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
RAM Concept
359
User Manual
Plotting Results
Punching Analysis
Table 17: Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
Value
User provided
reinforcement
Top
Vector component of
developed area of user
individual bars
intersected by the cross
sections
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Top Dev
Bottom Dev
(none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
RAM Concept
360
User Manual
Plotting Results
Punching Analysis
RAM Concept
361
User Manual
Plotting Results
Vibration Analysis
RAM Concept
362
User Manual
Plotting Results
Plot Animation Controls
RAM Concept
363
User Manual
Plotting Results
Difference Plot Controls
30.9.1
When the Plot Settings dialog is confirmed, the first frame of the animation is displayed with the maximum plot
values. When the animation is played, the data will shrink to the minimum values, then grow to the maximum
and repeat.
RAM Concept
364
User Manual
Plotting Results
Difference Plot Controls
RAM Concept
365
User Manual
31
RAM Concept
366
User Manual
RAM Concept
367
User Manual
As Top
As Bot.
As Shear Density
As Shear Spacing
As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule governed.
7. Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross section forces and other information.
Cross Section Strains
curvature
top, centroid and bottom strains
Concrete Forces for each block
top and bottom stress
force
force elevation
Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
elevation
strain
stress
bar area
force
Post-tensioning forces for each tendon
elevation
cross-section strain
component cross-section strain (considers tendon angle)
Tendon Force (effective force in cross section plane)
Related Links
Concrete Core Determination on page 779
RAM Concept
368
User Manual
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design > Selected Plan
Select the Auditor tool ( ).
Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section, or design section, you wish to audit.
Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross sections visible for the purpose of selecting the
correct one.
Note: The Auditor selects either (i) the nearest cross-section (of a visible span segment strip) to the point you
click, or (ii) nothing, if there is no cross section within 3 feet [1m] of the point you click. The cross-sections
themselves do not need to be visible.
Note: The Auditor will not display results if a Calc All has not been performed.
The Auditors results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out (
the analysis results are current).
),
RAM Concept
369
User Manual
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
axis angle
radius
Cover to CGS
Concrete Strength
Precompression
Resultant envelopes
Critical section perimeter properties
RAM Concept
370
User Manual
RAM Concept
371
User Manual
32
RAM Concept
372
User Manual
RAM Concept
373
User Manual
RAM Concept
374
User Manual
33
Formwork
Post-Tensioning
The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This does not include stressing
tails or allowance for drape.
Mild Steel
Reinforcing
RAM Concept
375
User Manual
RAM Concept
376
User Manual
34
Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization options to help you create professional printouts and
reports. You control the information included on a page and in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be
printed individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes the printing features you can use to achieve the
result you want and offers techniques for printing efficiently.
Note: See Determining the fit of plans for more information on setting the print scale of plan windows.
Related Links
General printing options on page 378
RAM Concept
377
User Manual
Printing
General printing options
RAM Concept
378
User Manual
Printing
Select and Configure Printer options
RAM Concept
379
User Manual
Printing
Determining the fit of plans
RAM Concept
380
User Manual
Printing
Previewing the print job
preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify that the scale and orientation of the model fit on the
page as intended.
Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ) to save the print viewpoint to what is visible on screen. This viewpoint
does not change unless you reset it. You can manipulate the model on screen without affecting the saved print
viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the Show Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
To set the print viewpoint
1. Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:
a.
).
Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes using the Scale tool (
b.
) and the Rotate about z-axis tool (
Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
).
c. Zooming to show the desired portion of the model.
d. Setting the projection to Parallel Projection ( ) or Perspective Projection (
Solid Modeling ( ) or Wire Modeling (
2. Click Set Print Viewpoint ( ).
).
).
RAM Concept
381
User Manual
Printing
Printing optimizations
34.6.3 Zooming
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in the print preview window. You can choose a zoom
factor of 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, Fit Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric
percentage of your choice (between 5% and 500%).
) and select 2-up to view two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages
) to page back.
RAM Concept
382
User Manual
Printing
Changing the report contents
2. Click on the Orientation column value for the item to toggle between Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value
of Default in the Orientation column sets the orientation to the default orientation set in the Page Setup
dialog box.
RAM Concept
383
User Manual
Printing
Changing the report contents
Figure 183: In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of report items, set whether an item is
included in the report, and change the printed orientation or an item.
RAM Concept
384
User Manual
Printing
Changing the report contents
This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit everything on a particular layer from the report. You
can do so with one click, rather then changing the Include value of every plan, perspective, and text table on that
layer to No.
1. Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report Contents window. You may need to widen the window
or scroll horizontally.
2. Click on the Include column value for the item you wish to include or exclude to toggle between Yes and No.
A value of Yes in the Include column includes the item in the report printout while a value of No excludes the
item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make sure every item in the hierarchy above it is also
included.
Example
The following is an example list of windows you might include in a report for an elevated PT slab
using the ACI 318 design approach:
RAM Concept
Report Cover
Units
Signs
Materials
Loadings
Load Combinations
Design Rules
Estimate
Element: Standard Plan
Element: Slab Summary Plan
Element: Structure Summary Perspective
Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All Loads Plan (if used)
Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
[other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used]
Service LC: Deflection Plan
Factored LC: Mx Plan
Factored LC: My Plan
Factored LC: Reactions Plan
Reinforcement: Latitude Bars Plan
Reinforcement: Longitude Bars Plan
Reinforcement: SSR Plan
Design Status: Status Plan
Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan
Load History Deflection Plans
385
User Manual
Printing
Changing the report contents
RAM Concept
386
User Manual
35
RAM Concept
) or Shrink Fonts (
387
User Manual
RAM Concept
388
User Manual
36
RAM Concept
389
User Manual
36.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead Loading and the Balance Loading during
export
RAM Concept adds the Self-Dead Loading reactions to the Dead Load reactions during export. This ensures
that the RAM Concrete Analysis of the structure considers the self-weight of the slab.
Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to have beam and slab self-weights calculated
automatically, or input manually as part of the dead load case. Conversely, RAM Concept always automatically
includes beam and slab self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using RSS in combination with
Concept, you have RSS automatically calculate the beam and slab self-weight loads. That will eliminate any
confusion regarding whether self-weight loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually specified as
part of the dead load case, even when some levels are designed with RSS and some levels are designed with
Concept.
RAM Concept does not currently export Transfer loading reactions to RSS. When analyzing a building with a
transfer slab, RSS uses its own internal distribution of the transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from RAM
Concept 's floor analysis. RAM Concept s exported Direct loading reactions will be used by RSS, if you so direct.
See Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete for further information.
RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a hyperstatic load case that is only visible in RAM
Concrete. Generally, balance forces and hyperstatic forces are not the same, but for a support that contains no
tendons, however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic forces.
Note: See Post-tensioning loadings for a discussion of balance and hyperstatic loadings.
Related Links
Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete on page 392
RAM Concept
390
User Manual
RAM Concept
391
User Manual
RAM Concept
392
User Manual
36.1.8 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept link works
The key to the export of RAM Concept 's reactions to RSS are the imported walls and columns and the imported
direct gravity loadings.
Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special RSS identifiers tagged to them. These identifiers
allow RAM Concept to match its column and wall elements to the corresponding members in RSS. RAM Concept
will even allow you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or 2").
RAM Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or significantly move imported columns or walls (or
do not import walls and columns). RAM Concept does this to ensure transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load
between RAM Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or the supports change in RSS, you can always reimport the
walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the structures. These loadings are Dead Load, Live Load
Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live Load Storage and Live Load Roof (when RAM Concept and RAM Concrete
are used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure compatibility with RSS, RAM Concept will not
allow you to delete these imported gravity loadings.
RAM Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS gravity loading and to add more gravity loadings. RAM
Concept assumes that you are fully aware that it considers only the loads that appear in the imported RSS
loadings in the reactions it exports back to RSS.
RAM Concept
393
User Manual
RAM Concept
394
User Manual
RAM Concept
395
User Manual
37
RAM Concept
396
User Manual
Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to create and whether to use posttensioning. The floor can be set up as post-tensioned or reinforced and can be one of the
following systems:
Two-way slab
One-way slab
Beam
Joist
Spans
Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including cantilevers). Decide if you are using
start or end cantilevers. Check Asymmetric to allow the model to have different tributaries
on either side of the columns.
Concrete
Mixes
Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for the supports.
Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the new file created when you started Strip Wizard. If you
want to use specific mixes, use a template when creating the new file.
Thickness
Start Width The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Start
Width is the left start width, and R Start Width is the right start width.
End Width
RAM Concept
The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L End Width is the left end width,
and R End Width is the right end width.
397
User Manual
W Depth
W Width
F Depth
Start Trib Width The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For
asymmetric strips, L Trib Start Width is the left tributary start width, and R Trib Start Width
is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib
End Width is the left tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary end width.
W Depth
W Width
F Depth
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the span to the pan (or void
former).
The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the end of the span.
Additional Web
Properties
The following properties determine the tributary width for the whole model. The
width cannot vary span by span.
Spacing
Number
RAM Concept
398
User Manual
Width
The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter zero for round columns).
Height
Bottom Fixity
Top Fixity
The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is not the incremental increase in
thickness.
Width
Before Length The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of the drop to the support center.
After Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the support center to the end of the drop.
RAM Concept
399
User Manual
The live load from the first support center to the second support center for each span.
Loadings to use The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the loads as belonging to any of the
Standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Dead
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Live
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file (except for that used for
Dead).
Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. RAM Concept calculates tendon friction and other losses if
jacks are located at one or both ends.
Min P/A
The minimum average precompression required for the concrete. Following the code minimum
does not usually result in the most economical design.
RAM Concept
400
User Manual
Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based upon. The choices are
self-weight of concrete, self-weight plus dead, or total load.
37.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile
Distance at Supports
The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The dimension is the total flat
distance, not the distance each side of the support.
Round Profiles to
Nearest
The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of tendon high and low points to
convenient values. If this value is too large it may cause cover violations.
Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural design.
Bottom
Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for flexural design.
Shear
Bottom
RAM Concept
401
User Manual
The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the top reinforcement. Usually this
is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. RAM Concept
subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d distance.
RAM Concept
402
User Manual
RAM Concept
403
User Manual
38
General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
Note: It is strongly suggested that you refer to Learning RAM Concept in Chapter 1, Introduction before
reading this chapter.
38.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use standard finite elements then the beams torsional
stiffness could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce the deflection in the adjacent slabs.
In RAM Concept , there is no difference between standard slab and beam elements, and standard elements have
a torsional stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed.
The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to the cube of the lesser value of depth and width.
Standard elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams that are deeper than they are wide.
For this reason, you should consider using the No-torsion behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See
Beam properties for more information.
RAM Concept
404
User Manual
General Tips
Walls
38.2 Walls
38.2.1 Drawing connecting walls
It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 188: Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that one has a wall above (Two images with
slab shown, two with no slab shown).
RAM Concept
405
User Manual
General Tips
Restraint
Figure 189: Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above (right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
38.2.3 The difference between walls above and upstand beams of similar
proportions
RAM Concept treats walls above the slab similarly to beams. Using wall-beams instead of just thickened slab
elements has both advantages and disadvantages; overall it is not recommended to model walls above the slab
as beams.
Slab elements have two major advantages over wall elements (wall-beams):
RAM Concept design strip cross sections automatically integrate the forces across slab elements. Wall-beam
elements are ignored in these integrations. Also, RAM Concept provides you many controls over how slab
element results can be displayed; wall-beam elements (like wall elements) can only plot their reactions to the
slab.
However, as discussed in Beams, RAM Concept s standard slab elements have a torsional stiffness that is
proportional to their depth cubed. This can cause a large over-estimation of the torsional stiffness for a very
thick slab element if it is adjacent to relatively thin elements. Wall-beam elements do not have this problem.
As such, walls above that are modeled as upstand beams should use the No-torsion beam setting discussed in
Beams.
When modeling wall-beams, RAM Concept interprets some of the wall element parameters differently. If the
wall-beam is not rotationally fixed to the slab then the wall-beam will have zero torsional stiffness. If the wallbeam is not a shear wall then it will have zero axial stiffness. The vertically compressible and rotationally fixed at
far end parameters are ignored.
Wall-beam elements have one advantage over slab elements. Slab elements of drastically differing thicknesses in
the same structure can cause the automatic plotting controls to show (correctly) huge force variations in and
adjacent to thick slab elements and almost no variation within the thin slab element areas. This does not
generally happen if walls above are modeled as wall-beams.
38.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (post-tensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model
columns with rollers and walls as slip walls (shear wall property unchecked).
It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a roller above will generally be appropriate
Restraint generally reduces the precompression and hence increases the service reinforcement. It usually
increases strength reinforcement too.
RAM Concept
406
User Manual
General Tips
Miscellaneous
38.4 Miscellaneous
There are many tools and capabilities described in the preceding chapters that are useful but often overlooked.
38.4.1 Templates
We have created a template (for the purpose of starting a file) that may or may not suit your needs. You can
create your own template with additional plans, materials and settings that you can use when you start a new
file. See About templates.
Related Links
Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects on page 78
RAM Concept
407
User Manual
General Tips
Miscellaneous
RAM Concept
408
User Manual
General Tips
Miscellaneous
RAM Concept
409
User Manual
39
RAM Concept
410
User Manual
39.2 Files
What is the difference between creating a mat (raft) file and an elevated slab file?
There is really no difference; all files give you the same capabilities. The default files are setup differently
because there are usually additional load cases and plans for a mat (lateral load cases, soil bearing plans, etc.).
With some work, you could turn any elevated slab file into a mat file and vice versa.
Can I save the data file with results?
This cannot be done with the current version - you need to open the file and recalculate. We expect to add this
feature in a future version (but the save with results files will be huge).
Can I work from CAD drawings?
RAM Concept
411
User Manual
RAM Concept
412
User Manual
39.3.3
How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?
See Determining which plans contain objects in Chapter 3, Understanding Layers.
I have two items at the same location, how do I select just one of them?
Double click at the location and you should select just one object. Hold down <Shift> and double click again and
you select the other object.
Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
The perspective camera may be looking in the wrong direction. Click Zoom Extent (
Viewpoint ( ).
) or Show Print
RAM Concept
413
User Manual
39.4 Units
What units can I use?
See Chapter 7, Choosing Units.
Can I switch units after creating a file?
See Changing the units.
Related Links
Changing the units on page 86
39.5 Codes
Can I change codes after creating a file?
Yes. See Code options.
39.7 Structure
39.7.1 Mesh Input layer
Why is it necessary to have priorities?
Without the priority system the modeling of floors would require one of two methods:
Objects for slabs of different thicknesses, beams, openings etc. could not overlap - this would be very
tiresome for all but very simple floors, or
Depths would have to additive. For example, you would have to deduct slab depth from beam depth. If you
had to change the slab depth then a change would be required for the beam, unless its depth changed by the
same amount.
RAM Concept
414
User Manual
RAM Concept
415
User Manual
39.7.3 Columns
Do columns restrain the slab?
Depending upon the defined fixity, columns can provide rotational and lateral restraint.
If the far end of a column is defined as a roller support (or both ends of the column are pinned) then the
column does not provide any lateral restraint to the slab.
Do columns above the slab support the slab vertically?
No. Columns only restrain the slab rotationally and laterally.
39.7.4 Walls
Do walls restrain the slab laterally?
Yes, if you select Shear Wall as a property. If the Shear Wall is unchecked then the slab is allowed to slip freely
over the top of the wall. The walls rotational stiffness is independent of the Shear Wall setting; use the fixity
settings to control the walls rotational stiffness about its longitudinal axis.
What is the effect of specifying walls above?
Wall elements can be used to model the stiffness and spanning ability of walls connected to the slab. You should
exercise caution when using them. See Walls above.
Do walls above the slab support the slab vertically?
No, they act like beams. See Walls above.
Do walls above the slab provide rotational restraint?
There is no restraint at the far end of a wall above. (Even if Rotationally Fixed at Far End is checked, it is
ignored).
RAM Concept
416
User Manual
39.8 Tendons
Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the tendon perspective?
The soffit elevation at each profile point is determined during the Analyze All and Calculate All commands. If one
of these commands is not performed since the drawing (or moving, etc.) of a tendon, or since a change in the
mesh, the tendon elevations in perspectives are not accurate.
The same is true for elevations optionally shown as text on the plans.
It is quicker to analyze (but not using Calculate All) with Process > Analyze All . This avoids processing the
design calculations.
What do Latitude and Longitude Tendons mean?
In the USA, Britain and other countries it is typical practice to place all the tendons in one direction in a
concentrated band over column lines. If the designer is using another practice then we recommend that you still
use the Latitude and Longitude tendon layers because it makes editing the PT easier. i.e. Put the tendons in the X
direction on one layer and the Y tendons on the other. Latitude and Longitude are just layer names.
Do I have to draw the tendons for a post-tensioned slab?
Yes. It is not difficult, and encourages you to address detailing issues before they become field problems.
How do I draw tendons?
See About drawing individual tendons, Drawing single tendons and Drawing multiple tendons.
You double click the tendon tool to change default tendon properties and then draw tendons span by span, or
panel by panel.
RAM Concept
417
User Manual
Figure 191: Termination of strands / tendons (jacked). Plan alignment of tendons is subjective.
Does Concept check to make sure the number of strands in connected tendon segments is consistent?
Yes. See section 40.3.3 of Chapter 40, Errors and Warnings.
How does Concept calculate friction losses?
RAM Concept only calculates friction losses if jacks are specified.
RAM Concept performs friction loss calculations considering the (elevation view) curvature of the tendons, the
(plan view) horizontal kinks in the tendon and the jacking and friction parameters. The stress in the tendon is
assumed to vary linearly along each tendon segment.
Along each tendon the following formula used is:
P2 = P1 * exp-(mu * theta + k * L)
where
RAM Concept
418
User Manual
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
At the joints between tendon segments Concept uses the following formula:
P4 = P3 * exp-(mu * angle)
where
RAM Concept incorporates seating loss (wedge draw-in loss) into the losses using the standard strain
integration formulation. The equations above are still used, but the known and unknown values are swapped.
RAM Concept adjusts the tendon stresses iteratively until the integration of the strain change in the tendon
equals the specified anchorage seat loss.
Long term losses are input by the user as a jack parameter.
See About jacks and Jack properties for more information.
Do I have to specify jacks?
No. RAM Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for
any tendon without a jack.
Does Concept calculate elongations (extensions)?
Yes, if jacks are specified. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view Jack Elongation on a plan.
Do the elongations (extensions) include the effect of the seating distance (wedge draw-in)?
Yes. The elongation reported includes the deduction of the seating distance.
Where are tendon profiles measured from?
See discussion on Profile in Drawing banded tendon polylines.
It's much easier to take all the strands and put them into one tendon bundle instead of having to lay
them all out. Is there much difference to the model whether you distribute tendons over the tributary or
not?
This is a matter of engineering judgment. There is certainly no need to lay out individual strands and it is usually
satisfactory to group strands in larger tendon groups than that installed in the field. Keep in mind that design
strip cross sections consider only the tendons that they cut through to calculate strength etc. There could be
instances where you want to model banded tendons in multiple groups (if the band is very wide).
RAM Concept
419
User Manual
39.9 Loadings
Is pattern loading possible?
Yes. See Chapter 21, Creating Pattern Loading.
For an irregular structure it is very time consuming to draw the area loads to match the structure. Is
there a faster way?
It is not necessary for area loads to match the structure. Area loads can overlap each other and they can
overhang the floor. This is shown in the PT tutorial.
RAM Concept
420
User Manual
39.9.1
Lateral SE
Consider the structure with two elevated floors shown in Figure 39-3. Each level is 3m high and the
structure is 10m wide.
RAM Concept
Fx2 = -50kN
421
User Manual
Fz2 = 15kN
My1 = 75kN-m
My2 = 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading. RAM
Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider (all of these are from the frame analysis).
The forces that the columns apply to the slab are:
Fx4 = -50kN
Fx5 = 50kN
Fx6 = -50kN
Fz3 = 15kN
Fz4 = -45kN
Fz5 = -15kN
Fz6 = 45kN
My3 = 75kN-m
My4 = 75kN-m
My5 = 75kN-m
My6 = 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading.
Since the 3 and 4 forces occur at the same location, they can be added together and applied as a
single load (same for 5 and 6).
RAM Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
Note: There is one simplification - if you do not care about diaphragm forces, then you can
ignore all the Fx and Fy forces. This assumes that the Fx and Fy forces act at the center of your
slab and that the centroid elevation of your slab is constant. When these two assumptions are
not true, the effects of these forces are typically still not large, but you may need to use some
judgment before you ignore them.
Can I input thermal loads into Concept?
Rationally considering thermal loads and stresses is difficult. RAM Concept does not make it
significantly easier.
The most important thing to remember is that thermal loads cause deformations, not forces. It is the
restraint of the deformations that induce forces into the slab.
RAM Concept
422
User Manual
RAM Concept
423
User Manual
39.10 Analysis
Should I use Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions in the Calc Options?
This is only necessary if your structure has no lateral stability, such as an elevated floor with columns on rollers,
or a mat (raft) with no X or Y direction springs. Auto-stabilize does not work if there are lateral loads.
39.12 Results
39.12.1 Reactions
Does Concept include the weight of columns and walls in self weight calculations?
RAM Concept never includes the weight of supports below.
You decide if the weight of supports above is included. This is a choice you can make in the Calculation Options.
Can I choose which column and wall reactions are shown?
Yes - you can change what RAM Concept plots. See Reaction.
If there are columns (and or walls) above and below an elevated slab you can select (through the Plot dialog)
which reactions are shown. The choices are
the total reaction on the slab (below and above)
the reaction below
the reaction above
RAM Concept
424
User Manual
39.12.2 Plots
Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
Figure 195: Plan of moment about Y-Y axis at opening. The circled moment is displayed as non-zero.
The plotted moments are smoothed curves of the element center moments.
A slab element at a free edge may have a small moment at it center. The values shown between element centers
are interpolated, but since there is no element outside the edge, there is no way for that value to ever reach zero.
For better visual results (values closer to zero at the edge), you should use smaller elements at the edge. The
distance from the edge to the edge element center is the most important parameter.
I have a pinned column at the edge of the slab. Why is there moment shown at the edge about an axis
parallel to the edge?
RAM Concept
425
User Manual
39.12.3 Torsion
I have set the Behavior of a beam to No-torsion. Why is there still torsion in the beam?
When you set your beams to have no torsion, you are really setting them to have no twist (Mxy).
Twist is only one component of torsion. Torsion is a moment that in RAM Concept is measured about the
centroid point of the cross section. The z-coordinate of this centroid is the mathematical centroid elevation of
the cross section, the x- and y- coordinates of the centroid are the centre of the core portion of the centroid.
The vertical shear in the cross section will create torsion unless it is centred upon the centroid. In an edge beam,
the vertical shear at the ends must be centered on the column, or there MUST be torsion to maintain equilibrium.
39.12.4 Envelopes
What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
An envelope is a resultant (set of forces) in which one of the force values is a maximum or minimum for an item
(such as a cross section) under consideration. All of the force values within a single envelope occur
simultaneously.
RAM Concept
426
User Manual
39.12.5 Reinforcement
Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
Yes.
1. Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan.
2.
Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3. Check Bar Spacings under the Span Designs or Section Designs columns.
Note: Plotted reinforcement quantities cannot show bar spacing.
Related Links
Span segment properties on page 207
Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong slab face?
This sometimes happens for an ACI318 or BS8110 / TR43 design.
RAM Concept locates the minimum reinforcing required by certain design criteria on the tension face of the slab
(or the face with the least amount of compression); this normally works well for both elevated slabs and mat
foundations.
However, in certain cases the moment at a design strip cross section is of the opposite sign of what would be
expected given the location. For an elevated slab this can lead to reinforcing at columns being at the bottom of
the slab and reinforcing at mid-span being at the top of the slab.
For example, for ACI318 or TR43 if there is no tension at a slab location under service conditions, then RAM
Concept places the minimum support rebar on the face with the least amount of compression. This could be the
bottom face at a column.
You can overrule this by choosing Elevated Slab for the design strip property CS Min. Reinforcement Location.
See Span segment properties.
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
This can be for a number of reasons. The common ones are:
1. The floor is post-tensioned and yet you have not checked the Consider as Post-Tensioned option. RAM Concept
is ignoring the tendons. See the description in Span segment properties.
RAM Concept
427
User Manual
Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
When designing to TR43 (BS8110) with bonded tendons, many designers are surprised to see bottom service
reinforcement.
TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that additional un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater
for the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for span zones in
flat slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress exceeds 0.15 f cu .
RAM Concept
428
User Manual
Figure 198: Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small number of strands (ii) near neutral axis
RAM Concept
429
User Manual
Figure 199: Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams
RAM Concept
430
User Manual
RAM Concept
431
User Manual
39.12.10 Deflection
Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is very important that you understand which ones do
and which do not. See Chapter 65, Load History Deflections.
Does Concept warn if deflection is too high?
No. Allowable deflection is a very subjective issue and RAM Concept does not warn if deflections exceed
conventional limits.
Note: Concept does display a warning when deflections are so large that the analysis itself may no longer be
valid. This typically happens for structures that are unstable or nearly unstable. Often the instability is related to
unrestrained lateral displacements.
RAM Concept
432
User Manual
39.13 Performance
What are the graphics cards requirements?
It is recommended that you use a graphics card supported by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer for
latest information on DirectX drivers.
If no graphics card supported by DirectX can be found, RAM Concept attempts to use software emulation under
Windows XP SP2 ,Vista and Windows 7. At least 128 MB of video RAM is recommended, but 256 MB is more
desirable. For optimal performance, graphics display color depth should be set to 24-bit or higher. When using a
color depth setting of 16-bit, some inconsistencies will be noted.
RAM Concept
433
User Manual
40
) dialog box.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
3. Check the Numbers box under the appropriate objects column, then click OK.
40.2 Meshing
RAM Concept can generate several different errors and warnings for meshing. A general description of meshing
limitations is in Limitations of the automatic meshing.
It is strongly advised that you heed such errors and warnings and fix the problems. Otherwise, RAM Concept
generates the mesh everytime you do a Calc All.
Note: Nearly all meshing problems are due to the users failure to use snapping properly.
40.2.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with the same priority overlap at (x,y)
Overlapping slabs and beams should have different priorities. This is explained in The priority method.
The error is generated when two or more overlapping slab or beam objects have the same priority.
RAM Concept
434
User Manual
RAM Concept
435
User Manual
40.2.5 An error has been found. Two column elements below the slab are at the
same location. Delete column element #a or #b.
This error occurs when you inadvertently draw a column at the same location twice, or copy and paste a column
and do not change the Support Set (above or below).
To fix this error
1. Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.
2.
Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
3. Check the Column numbers box.
4. Place the cursor at the appropriate column, double click and delete.
40.2.6 An error has been found. A column element below the slab is not attached
to the slab. Revise column element #a (below the slab)
This error occurs when a column is outside the slab boundary (or within an opening). To fix the problem you
should move the column or edit the slab such that the column is within the slab boundary.
40.2.7 It is good modeling practice to connect wall centerlines. Click on the Fix
button to move wall endpoints to a nearby centerline
This warning occurs when the end of a wall is drawn within close proximity, but not coincident with another
wall centerline. Walls should be modeled this way in order to create the best analytical finite element mesh.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix button). If you click this button, RAM Concept moves the
wall endpoint to the centerline of the nearby wall.
40.3 Loads
40.3.1 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A point load is not
on the slab. Revise point load #a.
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an error. Apart from generating the error, RAM Concept
essentially ignores the load.
RAM Concept
436
User Manual
40.3.2 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A line load is not
totally on the slab. Revise line load #a.
A line load that is not completely on finite elements generates this error. There may be times you ignore the
error, such as when a line load crosses an opening. RAM Concept ignores the part of the load crossing the
opening.
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A line load may appear to be on a slab edge, but actually be
outside it. If you believe you have a line load across an opening and ignore the error, you may miss a real
problem.
40.4 Tendons
40.4.1 Tendon # has a radius (a) that is less than the minimum allowable (b).
Parabolic tendons with a large drape relative to their length have a small radius. A warning is triggered when the
tendon segment radius is less than the minimum radius for that tendon system.
A tendons minimum (vertical) radius is specified in the Materials section. RAM Concept does not check
horizontal radii as tendon segments are straight in plan.
The radii shown are suggestions based on industry standards. You can change them based on advice from
prestress companies.
Note: The warning can be indicative of an overbalanced condition (too much uplift) for parabolic tendons.
To remove the warning you can adjust the tendon profile or change the minimum radius in the Material section.
To edit the minimum radius
1. Choose Criteria > Materials .
2. Edit the minimum radius for the PT system.
40.4.2 Cannot auto-position profile point at (x,y) due to profile point value
This warning occurs when both of the following are true for two tendon segments that share a Profile Point 2:
1. The tendon segments have the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option checked, and
2. One, and only one, of the tendon segments is flat (that is, the values for Profile Point 1 and Profile Point 2
produce a flat tendon segment: this usually occurs when the two values are equal).
RAM Concept
437
User Manual
40.4.3 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is
not on the slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the profile point at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon extends beyond the slab edge. To fix this error, stretch the profile point so its end is
on the edge or slightly inside the slab edge.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix button). If you click this button, RAM Concept moves the
profile point to the nearest concrete element.
40.4.4 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is
not within the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon profile point is not within the slab thickness. Profile values are always relative to the
slab or beam soffit at the location of the profile point. The easiest way to find these problems is to look at a
tendon perspective.
If a profile point is at a top or bottom surface step, RAM Concept moves the profile point so that there is no
ambiguity. You should check that the profile point is within the expected slab area.
40.4.5 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon profiles. A
tendon is out of the slab at (x,y).
This is different to 40.3.4 in that the profile points are within the slab, but the tendon is out of the slab
somewhere between the profile points. This usually occurs when there is a top or bottom surface step.
40.4.6 Tendon #a is harped, and hence violates the minimum allowable radius (b)
A harped tendon has (vertically) straight segments. There is thus a zero radius at the profile point(s).
To avoid the harped tendon warning
1.
2.
3.
4.
RAM Concept
438
User Manual
40.4.7 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective
stresses. A tendon has a different number of strands than an adjacent
tendon. Investigate tendon #a.
You can vary the number of strands along a continuous tendon, but it is discouraged. This warning alerts you
that the number of strands within the tendon is variable.
To avoid the warning go to the appropriate tendon layer (the dialog box indicates on which layer the tendon is
located) and change the number of strands in the tendon.
Note: It is usually best to use the Select Connected Tendons tool.
See Can I terminate some strands past a column? in Chapter 39, Frequently Asked Questions for more advice.
40.4.8 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective
stresses. A tendon is not connected to any jacks. Investigate tendon #a. [If
any tendons are stressed then all tendons must be stressed.]
RAM Concept calculates losses in tendons that have one or two jacks attached. RAM Concept does not allow a
(latitude or longitude) tendon layer to have some tendons with jacks but other tendons with no jacks. You can
have one tendon layer (say, latitude) with jacked tendons and the other tendon layer with no jacks.
When you encounter this error, find the tendon (from the number given) and draw at least one jack on the
tendon.
RAM Concept
439
User Manual
40.6 Miscellaneous
40.6.1 An Error occurred while trying to calculate everything. An error has
occurred while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The structure is
unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis Translation. Revise the structure.
This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear
walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure.
To auto-stabilize the structure
1. Choose Criteria > Calc Options
2. Choose the General tab
3. Check the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions box.
Note: This does not work if there are lateral loads.
40.6.2 An error occurred: Loading has horizontal loads, but the structure is
automatically stabilized in the X and Y directions.
You cannot auto-stabilize the structure if there are horizontal loads (other than tendons).
You must (1) uncheck the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions box in the General tab of the Calc Options,
and (2) provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral
springs etc.).
40.6.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set Service Design do not appear
compatible with the load factors in the load combinations using the rule
set. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have
a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and load factors of no more
than 1 for dead and live loadings. RAM Concept provides the warning when this is violated.
RAM Concept
440
User Manual
40.6.4 Load Combination Service (Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual
balance and / or hyperstatic load factors. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have
a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of zero for the Hyperstatic Loading. RAM Concept provides the warning when this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / max service) rule sets.
40.6.5 Rule Set Strength Design is being used by load combinations that appear
to have load factors set for different purposes. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Strength (or Ductility) rule sets should logically have a load factor (and
alternate envelope factor) of 1 for the Hyperstatic Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons). RAM Concept
provides the warning when this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Hyperstatic
Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors (and alternate envelope factors) for the
Hyperstatic Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the strength or ductility rule sets.
40.6.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There is less that 25% contact area.
When the mat (raft) has a significantly reduced bearing area it is likely that bearing pressures are very high and
there could be instability.
RAM Concept
441
User Manual
40.6.8 Too many slab shapes intersecting the column shape at (x,y)
RAM Concept uses very sophisticated algorithms to find the critical sections around the column and slab
irregularities. If the column intersects a large number of slab thickness changes (such as where beams frame in
on each side), the run time could be very long. In this instance, RAM Concept just reports this error. This error
can be resolved by making the punch check smaller, simplifying the slab geometry around the column, or
deleting the punch check.
40.6.9 An error has been found. The cross section trimming for strip ab-c has
caused there to be no concrete remaining at one or more locations.
This error is typically reported at steps in the slabs.
The inter cross section slope limit is trimming the entire cross section away at the step. See Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit Trimming for more information.
You can avoid the problem by setting the inter cross section slope limit to a large value in spans containing large
steps. You should, however, consider the underlying reason for the error.
40.6.10 An error has been found. [Design strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too
much cover (the bottom bar is closer to the top than the top bar).
The trimmed cross section has a thickness and covers such that the location of the bars is illogical.
This is likely to happen with thin slabs, or steps.
RAM Concept
442
User Manual
40.6.12 A cross section in design strip ab-c has a very small shear core
This normally occurs at small steps in the slab or changes in geometry in the slab. If a design cross section clips a
small change in slab thickness it can result in a small part of the cross section comprising the shear core. This can
normally be avoided by utilizing cross section trimming.
40.6.13 ab-c contains user transverse reinforcement but has multiple shear cores.
Shear/torsion calculations may be approximate
If user reinforcement is drawn in a cross section that contains multiple separate shear cores, the distribution of
the reinforcement between the cores is not known. The distribution of the transverse reinforcement within the
cores can significantly affect the strength. The calculations for this situation may therefore be approximate. To
eliminate this approximation, the span segment strips and design sections should be refined such that each cross
section only contains a single shear core.
40.6.14 ab-c contains user reinforcement that is not within the primary (largest)
shear core. This transverse reinforcement will be ignored
If user transverse reinforcement is drawn within a design cross section, but is not contained in the shear core (or
in the case of multiple shear cores, the largest shear core), it will be ignored. This error can be resolved by
moving the user transverse reinforcement to a plan location that will intersect the shear core of the cross
section.
40.6.15 An error has been found. ab-c contains multiple user transverse rebar
regions
Each cross section shear core can only contain a single user transverse reinforcement region. This error occurs
when more than one user transverse rebar has been drawn through a single cross section shear core. The error
can be resolved by deleting or moving the extraneous user transverse rebar.
RAM Concept
443
User Manual
41
RAM Concept
444
User Manual
RAM Concept
445
User Manual
Figure 201: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab area (hatched), and the columns.
RAM Concept
446
User Manual
Figure 203: Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456 and CSA A23.3 example).
Figure 204: Element: Standard Plan after regeneration (for ACI318 example; the metric codes produce a similar
mesh)
RAM Concept
447
).
User Manual
Figure 206: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): ACI318 example.
RAM Concept
448
User Manual
Figure 207: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS
456, & CSA A23.3 example.
RAM Concept
449
User Manual
Figure 210: Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
RAM Concept
450
User Manual
RAM Concept
451
User Manual
Figure 213: Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much more regular mesh.
RAM Concept
452
User Manual
RAM Concept
).
453
User Manual
RAM Concept
454
User Manual
Figure 215: Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456
RAM Concept
455
User Manual
Figure 216: Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)
View Reinforcement
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the eight design strips. See the following
figures.
RAM Concept
456
User Manual
Figure 219: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)
RAM Concept
457
User Manual
Figure 221: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.
RAM Concept
458
User Manual
Figure 222: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600.
Figure 223: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 224: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456.
Figure 225: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
controlling Criteria checked.
RAM Concept
459
User Manual
Figure 226: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
Controlling Criteria checked.
Figure 227: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
Controlling Criteria checked.
Figure 228: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
Controlling Criteria checked.
RAM Concept
460
User Manual
Figure 229: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.
RAM Concept
461
User Manual
Figure 230: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
Figure 231: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 232: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
RAM Concept
462
User Manual
View SSR
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
The result for BS8110 is shown in the fourth figure.
Figure 233: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Figure 234: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600
RAM Concept
463
User Manual
Figure 235: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 236: Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 237: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
41.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term.
RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours. You can investigate the effects of creep,
shrinkage and cracking with Load History Deflections. See Chapter 65, Load History Deflections for more
information.
Note: The following deflection plans DO NOT consider cracking, creep or shrinkage.
RAM Concept
464
User Manual
RAM Concept
465
User Manual
RAM Concept
466
User Manual
RAM Concept
467
User Manual
RAM Concept
468
User Manual
Figure 242: Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for ACI318.
Figure 243: Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for AS3600.
Figure 244: Ultimate LC: 1.4D+1.6L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for BS8110.
Figure 245: Ultimate LC: 1.5D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for IS 456.
RAM Concept
469
User Manual
RAM Concept
470
User Manual
Figure 247: Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are
shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 249: AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
RAM Concept
471
User Manual
Figure 250: Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are
shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
RAM Concept
472
User Manual
42
RAM Concept
473
User Manual
RAM Concept
474
User Manual
Figure 252: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
475
User Manual
Figure 253: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
476
User Manual
).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner (
other similar tools available for this button.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
477
User Manual
RAM Concept
478
User Manual
RAM Concept
479
User Manual
Figure 255: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 3 feet.
RAM Concept
480
User Manual
RAM Concept
481
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
482
User Manual
Figure 258: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 259: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
483
User Manual
Figure 260: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
484
User Manual
).
2.
RAM Concept
485
User Manual
14.
RAM Concept
486
User Manual
2.
RAM Concept
487
User Manual
4.
5.
RAM Concept
).
488
User Manual
RAM Concept
489
User Manual
RAM Concept
490
User Manual
RAM Concept
491
User Manual
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some should be deleted.
7. Select the second tendon in this panel.
8. Hold down <Shift> and select the fifth tendon in this panel, and press <Delete>.
9.
With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected, draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
a. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
b. Click at the profile point at 63.2, 58 ft.
c. Type r0,7.
d. Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 72.8, 65 ft.
a. Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
Proceed immediately to Define the manual longitude tendons Pt. 4.
RAM Concept
492
User Manual
RAM Concept
493
User Manual
).
a. Change the Tendon Orientation Angle to 90 degrees.
b. Change the Number of Strands to 0.6667 /feet, and click OK.
6.
) selected:
RAM Concept
494
User Manual
RAM Concept
495
User Manual
RAM Concept
496
User Manual
RAM Concept
497
User Manual
Figure 266: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following three figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
RAM Concept
498
User Manual
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
RAM Concept
499
User Manual
).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 270: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regeneration.
RAM Concept
500
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (the highlighted span segment in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Enter>.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now horizontal.
RAM Concept
501
User Manual
Figure 272: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
RAM Concept
502
User Manual
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. Enter Element Size of 2.5 feet and click Generate.
RAM Concept
503
User Manual
42.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
An error message appears concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.
RAM Concept
504
User Manual
Figure 275: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 276: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
42.7.5 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
RAM Concept completes the calculations without errors.
RAM Concept
505
User Manual
RAM Concept
506
User Manual
RAM Concept
507
User Manual
RAM Concept
508
User Manual
RAM Concept
509
User Manual
RAM Concept
510
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
511
User Manual
42.7.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
The Maximum Short Term Load, Sustained Load, and Final Instantaneous Load History Deflection Layers
provide contour plans for deflection.
RAM Concept
512
User Manual
RAM Concept
513
User Manual
RAM Concept
514
User Manual
Figure 285: Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
515
User Manual
43
RAM Concept
516
User Manual
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
3. Click the Drawing Import tab.
4. Click Show All, and then click OK.
RAM Concept
517
User Manual
Figure 286: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
518
User Manual
Figure 287: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
519
User Manual
).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner (
other similar tools available for this button.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
520
User Manual
RAM Concept
521
User Manual
RAM Concept
522
User Manual
Figure 289: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.
RAM Concept
523
User Manual
RAM Concept
524
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
525
User Manual
Figure 292: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 293: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
526
User Manual
Figure 294: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
527
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
528
User Manual
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon on grid B.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 10, and click OK.
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly below grid B.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 5, and click OK.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end
of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept
529
User Manual
RAM Concept
530
User Manual
9.
2.
RAM Concept
531
User Manual
RAM Concept
532
User Manual
RAM Concept
533
User Manual
RAM Concept
534
User Manual
RAM Concept
535
User Manual
RAM Concept
536
User Manual
RAM Concept
537
User Manual
or
Select Process > Generate Strips
The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 298: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
RAM Concept
538
User Manual
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
RAM Concept
539
User Manual
).
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.
RAM Concept
540
User Manual
Figure 303: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
RAM Concept
541
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Enter>.
RAM Concept
542
User Manual
Figure 305: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
43.5.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
1. Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3 (the highlighted line in the first figure in Generate the
longitude strips).
2. Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
3. Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK.
4. Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
5. Click at point A as shown in the previous figure.
6. Click at point B.
7. Right-click, and click enter.
8. Click at point C and D.
9. Right-click, and click enter.
10. Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
11. Click at point E as shown in the previous figure.
12. Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G (another corner).
13. Right-click, and click enter.
14. Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.
15. Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
RAM Concept
543
User Manual
Figure 307: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the
cantilever. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually in Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips.
RAM Concept
544
User Manual
RAM Concept
545
User Manual
43.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated.
Two more errors appear to do with reinforcement detailing.
3. Click Continue twice to clear the reinforcement error messages.
Figure 310: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
RAM Concept
546
User Manual
Figure 311: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
RAM Concept
547
User Manual
43.7.6 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
RAM Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links
Cross Section Trimming on page 224
RAM Concept
548
User Manual
RAM Concept
549
User Manual
43.7.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
RAM Concept
550
User Manual
RAM Concept
551
User Manual
RAM Concept
552
User Manual
Figure 318: Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
553
User Manual
44
RAM Concept
554
User Manual
RAM Concept
555
User Manual
Figure 319: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
556
User Manual
Figure 320: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
557
User Manual
).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner (
other similar tools available for this button.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
558
User Manual
RAM Concept
559
User Manual
RAM Concept
560
User Manual
Figure 322: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.
RAM Concept
561
User Manual
RAM Concept
562
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
563
User Manual
Figure 325: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 326: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
564
User Manual
Figure 327: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
565
User Manual
RAM Concept
566
User Manual
RAM Concept
567
User Manual
8.
2.
RAM Concept
568
User Manual
RAM Concept
569
User Manual
RAM Concept
570
User Manual
RAM Concept
571
User Manual
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
RAM Concept
572
User Manual
RAM Concept
573
User Manual
RAM Concept
574
User Manual
Figure 331: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as shown in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 180 and press <Return>.
RAM Concept
575
User Manual
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.
RAM Concept
576
User Manual
Figure 335: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
RAM Concept
577
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Return>.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
RAM Concept
578
User Manual
RAM Concept
579
User Manual
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.
RAM Concept
580
User Manual
44.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
An error message appears concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.
RAM Concept
581
User Manual
Figure 340: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 341: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
44.7.5 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All (
RAM Concept
582
User Manual
RAM Concept
583
User Manual
RAM Concept
584
User Manual
RAM Concept
585
User Manual
44.7.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
The Maximum Short Term Load, Sustained Load, and Final Instantaneous Load History Deflection Layers
provide contour plans for deflection.
RAM Concept
586
User Manual
RAM Concept
587
User Manual
RAM Concept
588
User Manual
Figure 350: Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
See Section distribution plots for more information.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
589
User Manual
45
RAM Concept
590
User Manual
RAM Concept
591
User Manual
Figure 351: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
592
User Manual
Figure 352: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
593
User Manual
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
594
User Manual
RAM Concept
595
User Manual
RAM Concept
596
User Manual
Figure 354: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.
RAM Concept
597
User Manual
RAM Concept
598
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
599
User Manual
Figure 357: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 358: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
600
User Manual
Figure 359: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
601
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
602
User Manual
RAM Concept
603
User Manual
8.
2.
RAM Concept
604
User Manual
RAM Concept
605
User Manual
RAM Concept
606
User Manual
RAM Concept
607
User Manual
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125 mm, and click OK.
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon on grid 2.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 10, and click OK.
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly to the right of grid 2.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 5, and click OK.
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the
end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept
608
User Manual
RAM Concept
609
User Manual
RAM Concept
610
User Manual
Figure 363: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following three figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as shown in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 180 and press <Return>.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
RAM Concept
611
User Manual
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.
RAM Concept
612
User Manual
Figure 367: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
RAM Concept
613
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Return>.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
RAM Concept
614
User Manual
RAM Concept
615
User Manual
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.
RAM Concept
616
User Manual
45.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
An error message appears concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.
RAM Concept
617
User Manual
Figure 372: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 373: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
45.7.5 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
RAM Concept completes the calculations without errors.
See Cross Section Trimming for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
RAM Concept
618
User Manual
RAM Concept
619
User Manual
RAM Concept
620
User Manual
RAM Concept
621
User Manual
RAM Concept
622
User Manual
RAM Concept
623
User Manual
RAM Concept
624
User Manual
RAM Concept
625
User Manual
RAM Concept
626
User Manual
RAM Concept
627
User Manual
45.7.10 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
RAM Concept
628
User Manual
RAM Concept
629
User Manual
RAM Concept
630
User Manual
RAM Concept
631
User Manual
Figure 383: Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L Max Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
632
User Manual
RAM Concept
633
User Manual
46
RAM Concept
634
User Manual
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
3. Click the Drawing Import tab.
4. Click Show All, and then click OK.
RAM Concept
635
User Manual
Figure 384: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
636
User Manual
Figure 385: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
637
User Manual
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
638
User Manual
RAM Concept
639
User Manual
RAM Concept
640
User Manual
Figure 387: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.
RAM Concept
641
User Manual
RAM Concept
642
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
643
User Manual
Figure 390: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 391: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
644
User Manual
Figure 392: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
645
User Manual
).
RAM Concept
646
User Manual
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon on grid B.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 10, and click OK.
With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly below grid B.
Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 5, and click OK.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end
of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept
647
User Manual
RAM Concept
648
User Manual
2.
RAM Concept
649
User Manual
RAM Concept
650
User Manual
RAM Concept
651
User Manual
RAM Concept
652
User Manual
RAM Concept
653
User Manual
RAM Concept
654
User Manual
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12. Click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
RAM Concept
655
User Manual
Figure 396: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
RAM Concept
656
User Manual
Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as shown in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 180 and press <Enter>.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
RAM Concept
657
User Manual
Figure 400: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
).
The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.
RAM Concept
658
User Manual
RAM Concept
659
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Enter>.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
RAM Concept
660
User Manual
Figure 403: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
46.5.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
RAM Concept
661
User Manual
Figure 405: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of
a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the
cantilever. See the discussion in Defining strip boundaries manually in Chapter 22, Defining Design Strips.
RAM Concept
662
User Manual
RAM Concept
663
User Manual
46.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated.
One more error appears to do with reinforcement detailing.
3. Click Continue to clear the reinforcement error message.
Figure 408: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
RAM Concept
664
User Manual
Figure 409: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
RAM Concept
665
User Manual
46.7.6 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
RAM Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See Cross Section Trimming for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links
Cross Section Trimming on page 224
RAM Concept
666
User Manual
RAM Concept
667
User Manual
46.7.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
RAM Concept
668
User Manual
RAM Concept
669
User Manual
RAM Concept
670
User Manual
Figure 416: Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
671
User Manual
47
RAM Concept
672
User Manual
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
3. Click the Drawing Import tab.
4. Click Show All, and then click OK.
RAM Concept
673
User Manual
Figure 417: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
674
User Manual
Figure 418: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
675
User Manual
).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner (
other similar tools available for this button.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
).
Select the Slab Opening tool (
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.
RAM Concept
676
User Manual
RAM Concept
677
User Manual
RAM Concept
678
User Manual
Figure 420: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.
).
Click Generate Mesh (
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.
RAM Concept
679
User Manual
RAM Concept
680
).
User Manual
RAM Concept
681
User Manual
Figure 423: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 424: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
682
User Manual
Figure 425: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
683
User Manual
RAM Concept
684
User Manual
RAM Concept
685
User Manual
10.
2.
RAM Concept
686
User Manual
RAM Concept
687
User Manual
RAM Concept
688
User Manual
RAM Concept
689
User Manual
RAM Concept
690
User Manual
RAM Concept
691
User Manual
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.75 meters.
10. Click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 429: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following three figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
RAM Concept
692
User Manual
Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as shown in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 180 and press <Return>.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
RAM Concept
693
User Manual
).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 433: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
RAM Concept
694
User Manual
Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).
Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
Select the Rotate tool ( ).
Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 90 and press <Return>.
RAM Concept
695
User Manual
RAM Concept
696
User Manual
RAM Concept
697
User Manual
47.7.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All (
RAM Concept
698
User Manual
Figure 438: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 439: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
RAM Concept
699
User Manual
47.7.5 Recalculate
1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
RAM Concept completes the calculations without errors.
See Cross Section Trimming for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links
Cross Section Trimming on page 224
RAM Concept
700
User Manual
RAM Concept
701
User Manual
RAM Concept
702
User Manual
RAM Concept
703
User Manual
RAM Concept
704
User Manual
RAM Concept
705
User Manual
RAM Concept
706
User Manual
47.7.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
The Maximum Short Term Load, Sustained Load, and Final Instantaneous Load History Deflection Layers
provide contour plans for deflection.
RAM Concept
707
User Manual
RAM Concept
708
User Manual
RAM Concept
709
User Manual
RAM Concept
710
User Manual
Figure 447: Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S Max Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
Section distribution plots on page 340
RAM Concept
711
User Manual
RAM Concept
712
User Manual
48
RAM Concept
713
User Manual
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.
3. Click the Drawing Import tab.
4. Click Show All, and then click OK.
RAM Concept
).
714
User Manual
3. Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a quadrilateral. This shape need not
match the slabs exact dimensions, but should cover the entire slab.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
RAM Concept
715
User Manual
RAM Concept
716
User Manual
RAM Concept
User Manual
RAM Concept
718
User Manual
RAM Concept
), select all of the other dead loads by fencing the entire slab.
719
User Manual
RAM Concept
720
User Manual
RAM Concept
721
User Manual
Figure 455: East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a five-storey building. The load elevation is the average floor
height (third storey).
Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about the mat centroid.
RAM Concept
722
User Manual
RAM Concept
723
User Manual
), select the seven span segments highlighted in red in the previous figure and
RAM Concept
724
User Manual
Figure 458: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
Two span segments are slightly skewed. How you treat skewed strips is also a subjective matter, but in this
tutorial we suggest the span segment strips cross sections are manually reoriented.
), select span segments 5-2 and 6-2 as shown in the previous figure.
With the Selection tool (
2. Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
3. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
4. Click near one of the span segments, and then again above or below the first click.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now vertical.
RAM Concept
725
User Manual
RAM Concept
726
User Manual
16.
17.
18.
19.
RAM Concept
727
User Manual
Figure 462: Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
), select span segments 9-3 and 12-1 as shown in the previous figure.
With the Selection tool (
2. Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
RAM Concept
728
User Manual
RAM Concept
729
User Manual
RAM Concept
730
User Manual
48.6.2 Calculate
1. Click Calc All (
RAM Concept
731
User Manual
RAM Concept
732
User Manual
RAM Concept
733
User Manual
Figure 470: Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
RAM Concept
734
User Manual
49
RAM Concept
735
User Manual
RAM Concept
736
User Manual
Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m].
Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as Fixed.
Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels page.
RAM Concept
737
User Manual
RAM Concept
738
User Manual
RAM Concept
739
User Manual
Figure 472: The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Figure 473: The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip after the mesh has been generated.
Figure 474: The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh regeneration.
Figure 475: The completed strip on the ManualLatitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
740
User Manual
49.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final design for a strip within a floor. The results are similar
to those generated by any strip program, but not as accurate as a RAM Concept model that considers all of the
irregularities within a floor.
RAM Concept
741
User Manual
50
Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific
information on how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
RAM Concept
742
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Review of plate behavior
RAM Concept s global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete behaves like a linear-elastic material.
However, the following discussion of the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium
considerations, and therefore is valid for any material.
Note: P-delta effects are not considered.
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be:
Fx/x + Vxy/y = -Px
Fy/y + Vxy/x = -Py
where Px and Py are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs
circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:
RAM Concept
743
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Review of plate behavior
RAM Concept
744
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Review of plate behavior
For a differential element the moments and shears are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be:
Vxz/x + Vyz /y = -Pz
Mx/y + Txy/x = -Vyz
My/x + Txy/y = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs
circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like
relationship:
RAM Concept
745
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Review of plate behavior
RAM Concept
746
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Finite element analysis
Fx = Fx
Vxy = Vxy
Vxz = Vxz
My = My - Fxd
Mxy = Mxy - Vxyd
RAM Concept
747
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Orthotropic behavior
RAM Concept
748
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
RAM Concept
749
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
Force
Related Stress
Fx
Fy
Vxy
Vxz
Vyz
Mx
My
Txy
Torsional moment
RAM Concept
750
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
RAM Concept
751
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
50.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams for bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will assume a linear
distribution of bending stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
RAM Concept
752
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored.
In design, RAM Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep
beams and RAM Concept will not provide any deep beam detailing information. RAM Concept s shallow beam
calculations will generally be conservative for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide
appropriate detailing for the deep beam.
50.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will over-estimate the stiffness
of a deep beam subjected to transverse bending moments. RAM Concept s analysis will assume that the entire
beam is effective in resisting the transverse moment.
RAM Concept
753
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
RAM Concept
754
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
RAM Concept
755
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
RAM Concept
756
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a K-factor, it is generally recommended to
provide a minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack
without precipitating a failure.
RAM Concept
757
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Wall behavior
RAM Concept
758
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Post-tensioning loadings
where
As
Atotal
Is
Is
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid supports, design sections without tendons
and design strips without tendons), Fp is zero, so:
Fh = Fb
For slab elements the calculation of Fp for every element is not performed, as there is no clear definition of Fp
for anything except a cross section. RAM Concept s slab analysis plots assume Fp = Fb ( Fh = 0), but these
plotted values are not used in the slab design and checking. RAM Concept calculates design section and design
strip cross section forces (without the assumption of Fp = Fb ) as follows:
Fh = Fb - Fp
RAM Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use RAM Concept s slab analysis plots for cross-section design
values in PT structures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because
design strips and design sections provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects by A. Bommer; PTI
Journal, January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
RAM Concept
759
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Self-equilibrium analysis
RAM Concept
760
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Self-equilibrium analysis
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the
loads applied must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium RAM Concept will apply
restraints to the slab to ensure that equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the
Calc Log.
Note: See Importing a database in of Chapter 14, Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are
not known before the analysis.
Related Links
Changing Analysis on page 104
Importing a database on page 127
RAM Concept
761
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Design strip and design section forces
RAM Concept
762
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Design strip and design section forces
3. A cross section core is determined (see Concrete Core Determination). For a T shaped section the core
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core
will be the entire section.
4. The cores x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroids x and y coordinates.
5. You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 31,
Using the Auditor for more information.
=
=
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
w = 8M/L2
where
RAM Concept
763
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Design strip and design section forces
M
M1
M2
M3
=
=
=
=
(M1 + M2 )/2 - M3
moment at first cross section
moment at last cross section
moment at cross section closest to midway between first and last cross
sections
clear span
=
=
(DL or DL + RLL)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an undefined
balance load percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The
difference are due to:
diversion of PT effects
clear span vs total span
moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, DL is based on the dead loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
In the calculations, RLL is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (parking) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer)
+ Live (unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
Related Links
Viewing balanced load percentages on page 335
50.8.6 Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label Don't reduce Integrated M and
V due to Sign Change. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces
for every loading and load pattern:
1. Standard Integration - this is as described in Calculating the forces on the cross section.
2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated
bending moment value are considered.
3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated
bending moment value are considered.
4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical
shear value are considered.
RAM Concept
764
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Result categories in RAM Concept
5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical
shear value are considered.
The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of
moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be
less than that for a shorter sub- cross section.
The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances:
Standard Integration - all values always considered.
Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending
moment in Standard Integration.
Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending
moment in Standard Integration.
Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in
Standard Integration.
Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in
Standard Integration.
When the Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option is selected, the design forces are always
more conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due
consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross
section forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to
the conservatism of the option.
RAM Concept
765
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Result categories in RAM Concept
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
Note: Min refers to the minimum signed value, not the minimum absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept:
RAM Concept
766
User Manual
Analysis Notes
Result categories in RAM Concept
There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns.
These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load combinations, but the result of the
RAM Concept s calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations
that use the rule set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously
with the most extreme envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab
except for those with the Standard context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as
the standard envelope, but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concept s enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be
possible, however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in
the envelopes may be critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning)
and/or additional load combinations (without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single
load combination) to ensure that the force set of concern is considered in the design.
RAM Concept
767
User Manual
51
RAM Concept
768
User Manual
RAM Concept
769
User Manual
=
=
=
=
strain in tendon
strain in concrete adjacent to tendon
strain in tendon at time of bonding
strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically negative)
RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when calculating the pi and ci values for each
tendon in each design cross section:
All tendon long-term losses (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage) occur before bonding.
The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same as the weight of the concrete. The
only forces in the concrete are those due to the balance loading.
The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and the initial concrete modulus.
=
=
=
=
=
c
L
L1
L2
u
=
=
=
=
=
fpu
With this substitution (and the one for u ) the equation becomes:
RAM Concept
770
User Manual
=
=
=
=
k
flimit
=
=
For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p used in the ACI equations,
RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same
limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp used in the AS equations, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
RAM Concept
771
User Manual
RAM Concept
772
User Manual
kc
cs
f()
=
=
=
=
=
stress in concrete
concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0)
strain in cross section
shrinkage strain
concrete material short-term stress-strain curve
This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is never used for gross-section or
cracked-section stress predictions.
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a
default.
RAM Concept
773
User Manual
=
=
=
=
=
As Bransons formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned
structures), we have modified it to consider axial forces:
Ie = (fcr/fa)4 Ig + [1 (fcr/fa)4] Icr
where
fcr
fa
=
=
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Bransons formula. If there are axial forces, this
formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula.
We call the value (fcr/fa)4 Bransons Stress Ratio. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
RAM Concept
774
User Manual
( )
M cr 2
Ma
where
Mcr
Ma
=
=
This stress ratio is only the right hand side of equation 7.19 as we use this ratio to modify the uncracked results.
In Eurocode 2 this stress ratio is subtracted from unity to be applied to the cracked results. As this formula does
not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to
consider axial forces:
SR =
( )
f cr 2
fa
where
fcr
fa
=
=
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to the eq. 7.19 formulation. If there are axial forces,
this formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of the Eurocode formula. This
value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0
=
=
=
RAM Concept
775
User Manual
BSR
Cccs
the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic
strain
Bransons Stress Ratio or Eurocode 2 Stress Ratio (see Bransons Stress
Ratio or Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio)
the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage
(see Cracked Section Analyses)
Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile strength, then the effective curvature ratio
will be equal to the concrete material creep factor (kc ).
If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for the active design rules, then the
gross-section calculations are performed with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross
section forces.
It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete material creep factor (kc ). These cases
occur if the amount of reinforcement is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater
than the gross stiffness (including concrete creep).
k ( M )( ECR )( M / EI ) d l
k ( M )( M / EI ) d l
Deflection Multiplier =
( M )( ECR )( M / EI ) d l
( M )( M / EI ) d l
Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the
structure will become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce ecr .
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral.
RAM Concept
776
User Manual
=
=
=
crack width
cross section strain at crack elevation
crack spacing
The cross section strain (c ) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in a cracked-section analysis using
the plane sections remain plane assumption.
The crack spacing (sc ) is more difficult to predict.
For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
h sc 2 h
where
h
For reinforcement with no-slip with the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
d* sc 2 d*
where
d*
sb
For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that:
sc = 2 d*
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to
a maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded
reinforcement. The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as:
w c = 2 c d* (d* h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that:
d * = ci2 + (si / 2)2
for all reinforcement i
w = s;
where
RAM Concept
777
User Manual
si
w
=
=
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered
minimizes the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar
equivalent. Unbonded and external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to
the cross section are ignored also.
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
RAM Concept
778
User Manual
RAM Concept
779
User Manual
RAM Concept
780
User Manual
52
52.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design
strip segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live
(Reducible) Loading than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
52.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not
affect the loading analysis. The analysis results that RAM Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live
load reduction.
RAM Concept
781
User Manual
Multiple
Columns
Punching Checks
RAM Concept
782
User Manual
Multiple
Figure 490: Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would
typically deem the influence area to be 2400 square feet.
RAM Concept
783
User Manual
Figure 491: Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
RAM Concept
784
User Manual
RAM Concept
785
User Manual
Figure 493: Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
RAM Concept
786
User Manual
Figure 494: Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
RAM Concept
787
User Manual
RAM Concept
788
User Manual
RAM Concept
789
User Manual
RAM Concept
790
User Manual
RAM Concept
791
User Manual
RAM Concept
792
User Manual
53
Reinforcement Notes
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement
development lengths and lays out and details reinforcement.
RAM Concept
793
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
RAM Concept
794
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
RAM Concept
795
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
of developed reinforcement is calculated from the AsRaw requirements and the length available for
development, and applied as a minimum AsDev requirement in each cross section.
RAM Concept
796
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
53.1.3 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08, 318-11 Code Span Detailing Rules
RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.3 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the inflection
point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. ACI 12.11.1 is implemented in span
regions.
RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.3.8 (without drop panels) is implemented in support and span regions.
PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs Rule 18.9.4.2 is implemented in support regions. Rule 18.9.4.1
is implemented in span regions.
RAM Concept
797
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
RAM Concept
798
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
The end of any user defined bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended will use a
desired extension length of zero.
For any length less than the additional extension length, the effective development is zero.
For any length greater than or equal to the desired additional extension length, but less than the full
development length, the effective percentage development is (provided length)/(full development length)
x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed.
For any length greater than the full development length, the effective development is 100%.
Figure 497: Effective development at any point along a bar. (This does not apply to AS3600 - see the following
figure)
When laying out program-designed bars, RAM Concept uses the first option in the following list that fits in
the slab:
Straight bar end with full development length and full extension length.
Straight bar end with full development length and partial (or no) extension length.
90 degree hook bar end with 90 degree hook development length
180 degree hook bar end with 180 degree hook development length
Anchored bar end with no development length
If the end of a bar is closer to a slab edge than the specified end cover, the bar will automatically be labeled
anchored in RAM Concept and considered to be fully developed.
Development lengths of bars in compression are not considered. Tension development lengths are used in all
locations where development of reinforcement is required, regardless of the actual stresses on the
reinforcing bar.
RAM Concept
799
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
Note: the product is never taken as greater than 1.7.
= reinforcement size factor
0.8 for #6 and smaller bars
1.0 for #7 and larger bars
= lightweight aggregate concrete factor
1.3 for concrete density 120 pcf
1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf
c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not
considered)
The term (c + Ktr)/db is never taken greater than 2.5
Ktr is conservatively assumed to be zero
For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated in accordance with the
following equation:
1200db
f
RAM Concept
800
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
For any length greater than or equal to the additional extension length, but less than the full development
length, the effective percentage development is (provided length - desired extension length) / (full
development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed.
For a program designed bar, when the bar is detailed the bar will be extended the full development length
plus the desired extension length. If a bar is unable to be extended this full desired length, Concept will
attempt to extend the bar just the straight development length, then the 90 degree hook development
length, and the 180 degree hook development length. If there is not enough extension space to satisfy any
of these conditions, an anchor will be placed at the end of the bar and it will be considered fully
developed from that point.
Figure 498: Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for AS3600
ONLY)
AS 3600-2001
Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 13.1.2.1(a). The following factors are
used in this equation:
k1 = reinforcement location factor
concrete below is taken as the depth from the bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.25 for concrete below > 300 mm
1.0 for concrete below 300 mm
k2 = 2.4 (conservatively)
fsy = yield stress of bar
Ab = cross sectional area of reinforcing bar
2a + db = twice the vertical distance from the nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar
RAM Concept
801
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
In accordance with 8.1.8.1, the extension length used for this Code is the overall depth of the section. This
extension is applied in addition to the required development length. RAM Concept applies the extension length
to satisfy the Code provision requiring the displacement of the bending moment envelopes by a distance D.
There are some noteworthy differences between RAM Concept 's approach and the Code provision:
In most circumstances, extending the bar by a distance D beyond the required development length will
satisfy the intent of the Code.
Near the ends of members, where the displaced moment diagram would cause an increased design moment,
RAM Concept will design for the unmodified moment diagram, but will still ensure proper development is
satisfied.
AS 3600-2009
Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 13.1.2.2. The following factors are used in
this equation:
k1 = reinforcement location factor
concrete below is taken as the depth from the bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.3 for concrete below > 300 mm
1.0 for concrete below 300 mm
k2 = (132 - db)/100
fsy = yield stress of bar
cd = assumed to be the vertical clear cover, implying that the minimum bar clear spacing is greater than or
equal to twice the clear cover
f y db
m 4 f cu
where
RAM Concept
802
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
fy
db
m
=
=
=
=
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are
not provided, the development lengths will need to be specified manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this.
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
1.3 for concrete density 1900 kg/m3
1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bar diameters less than or equal to
18mm and 3.5db for bar diameters greater than 18mm.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 4 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed
12db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (b)
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed
24db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (a)
In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the
farthest concrete surface.
fy
4 bd
where
fy
bd
=
=
=
For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for
any bar with fy > 250 N/mm2.
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
RAM Concept
803
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
1.0 for uncoated bars
lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3
1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bars with yield stress less than or
equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4db for bars with yield stress greater than 250 N/mm2.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (1).
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (2).
In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the
farthest concrete surface.
sd
4 f bd
where
sd
fbd
=
=
yk
=
=
=
=
=
RAM Concept
804
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
A concrete density factor calculated in accordance with equation 11.1 is applied to the calculation of fbd in
equation 8.2.
In addition, the following factor (from ACI 318) are applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
k2
concrete below is taken as the depth from the rebar center to the
bottom of the concrete section
1.3 for concrete below > 300 mm
1.0 for concrete below 300 mm
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bars) less than 3db
(spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
Note: The product of k1k2 is never taken as greater than 1.7.
k3
k4
dcs
RAM Concept
805
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
How RAM Concept lays out longitudinal program reinforcement
1.3 for concrete density 1,850 kg/m3
1.0 for concrete density > 1,850 kg/m3
Epoxy-coated reinforcement factor = 1.2 (12.5.3f)
The following factors/provisions are not considered:
Concrete cover (12.5.3b) and ties or stirrups (12.5.3c)
Requirements with all similar characteristics are grouped together for further processing.
Step 2 Find regions of overlapping and nearby requirement
For each requirement group, RAM Concept then finds requirements in a region that may be able to be satisfied
by the same reinforcement callout.
Step 3 Create preliminary callouts for each region
For each region's requirements, RAM Concept creates an optimal set of reinforcement callouts considering the
cost factors specified in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog. These preliminary callouts do not consider
development lengths.
Step 4 Consider development lengths
For each preliminary callout, RAM Concept investigates all of the related cross sections and determines
(considering the area of developed reinforcement and the total area of reinforcement required at each cross
section) the necessary extension of the bar beyond the related cross sections.
If the required bar extension cannot be provided (due to a slab edge or bar end cover requirements), reduced
extensions using 90-degree or 180-degree hooks are investigated. If the hooks will not provide the adequate
development, anchors will be placed at the end of the bar.
Note: Any bar that is required to extend to within the end cover distance of a slab edge will be given an anchor
end condition.
Step 5 Convert to concentrated program reinforcement
RAM Concept
806
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
How RAM Concept details longitudinal user and program reinforcement
As a final step, RAM Concept converts the bar callouts (including development lengths and bar end conditions)
into concentrated program reinforcement.
See also Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters in Chapter 28, Calculating Results.
RAM Concept
807
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
How Concept treats transverse user and program reinforcement and individual transverse bars
Lastly, RAM Concept converts the trimmed preliminary layout of bars into individual bars. This conversion sets
the individual bars generated from user reinforcement to be user bars and those generated by program
reinforcement to be program bars.
Figure 499: Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identical except for the respective location of the
elevation reference point
Figure 500: Reinforcement bars detailed by RAM Concept from the previous figure
53.5 How Concept treats transverse user and program reinforcement and
individual transverse bars
RAM Concept generates program transverse reinforcement from the results of its shear and torsion calculations.
This generated reinforcement is for display purposes onlyit is not used in calculations. It can be changed to
user reinforcement in order to include it in the design/analysis calculations. At locations of complicated
geometry (such as multiple beams in a single span design, or curved beams), RAM Concept may not be able to
RAM Concept
808
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
create an appropriate representation of the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The correct
design quantities can always be viewed in the Section Design plots of the Design Status Layer.
User transverse reinforcement is considered in the design and analysis of cross sections. The properties of the
user transverse reinforcement that intersect a shear core are considered to fully reinforce that section,
regardless of how far the reinforcement extends beyond the core. Because capacities are only calculated at each
cross section location, caution should be exercised to extend each user reinforcement region an appropriate
amount beyond the section (i.e., half the distance to next cross section).
User transverse reinforcement assumes the reinforcement is oriented and sized optimally to reinforce each
cross section. This assumption means that the assumed transverse reinforcement will lie in parallel planes to the
cross section planes. If a user transverse reinforcement region intersects multiple cross sections that are not
aligned, the resulting assumed transverse reinforcement will be aligned with each cross section at each
intersection location. The assumed size of user transverse reinforcement (which affects calculated shear and
torsion properties) is based upon the dimensions of the shear core and the location of the longitudinal program
bars (whether any were actually designed or not), along with the minimum diameter of any design or user
transverse bars in the cross section.
RAM Concept generates transverse individual bars from user and program transverse reinforcement. These
transverse individual bars are for display purposes only and are not used directly in the calculations. At
locations of complicated geometry, RAM Concept may not be able to create an appropriate representation of the
detailed reinforcement. However, even in complicated geometry the user transverse reinforcement properties at
each intersecting cross section are considered correctly.
Note: If a closed shape is used in conjunction with more than two legs, only two of the legs will be considered
able to resist torsion and the remaining legs will be available to resist shear only.
Note: Program transverse reinforcement required by design sections is not shown in on the Reinforcement
layer. This is another reason why design spans are preferable to cross sections.
RAM Concept
809
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on the reinforcement for the design status layer.
RAM Concept
810
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
these program bars are rationalized such that the number of top bars is consistent either side of a support
these program bars could be changed to User bars
individual bars can be shown via the visible objects
RAM Concept details the top bars at the right hand support with a 90 degree bend
RAM Concept
811
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 503: Reinforcement: Standard Plan with the Bar Length Cost parameter set to 3.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code has no effect.
RAM Concept
812
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 504: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [without span detailing]
Note: See Section 30.6 of Chapter 30, Plotting Results for more information about reinforcement plotting.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
RAM Concept
813
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 505: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [with span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
This plot is exactly the same as Bottom without span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because this
example uses just the Strength Rule Set and all such reinforcement must be developed.
RAM Concept
814
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 506: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH Span Detailing
RAM Concept
815
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
RAM Concept
816
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 508: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span detailing]
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses skyline plotting.
RAM Concept
817
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 509: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITH span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) without span detailing:
This plot is different from Bottom without span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the
Minimum reinforcement is not required to be developed.
RAM Concept
818
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 510: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITHOUT span detailing
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
This plot is different from Bottom with span detailing (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement at the end supports is not developed, and so the plotted value is zero.
Additionally, portions of the raw reinforcement are now assumed to be developed because the span detailing
process for the design status layer considers that continuous bars, whether they are required to be developed or
not, become at least partially developed.
RAM Concept
819
User Manual
Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
Figure 511: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH span detailing
RAM Concept
820
User Manual
54
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
821
User Manual
RAM Concept
822
User Manual
54.2.6 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load
combination is used by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 0.25 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
823
User Manual
RAM Concept
824
User Manual
RAM Concept
825
User Manual
RAM Concept
826
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
827
User Manual
RAM Concept
828
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
54.5.3 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
829
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
54.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
830
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
54.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 25: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.3
18.8.1
One-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
Two-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
RAM Concept
831
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
One-Way Slab
(none)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
RAM Concept
832
User Manual
RAM Concept
833
User Manual
RAM Concept
834
User Manual
c Acp
25psi ph bw
RAM Concept
835
User Manual
RAM Concept
836
User Manual
RAM Concept
837
User Manual
To be rational (instead of literally following the code), d is taken as the depth of the total tension
reinforcement, not just the depth of the PT
For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see Unified Design
Recommendations for Reinforced.... by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2,
April-March 1992
section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum wc for the cross section is
used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
838
User Manual
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is
counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning
that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of
(fpy-fse ), (0.5 fpy ) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy ) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f , the minimum length requirements of
c
RAM Concept
839
User Manual
RAM Concept
840
User Manual
55
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
841
User Manual
RAM Concept
842
User Manual
RAM Concept
843
User Manual
RAM Concept
844
User Manual
RAM Concept
845
User Manual
RAM Concept
846
User Manual
RAM Concept
847
User Manual
RAM Concept
848
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
849
User Manual
RAM Concept
850
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
RAM Concept
851
User Manual
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
55.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of posttensioned members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
852
User Manual
RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.3, 18.4.2b,
18.9.3.2
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
55.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
RAM Concept
853
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
55.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 32: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
RAM Concept
854
User Manual
RAM Concept
855
User Manual
RAM Concept
856
User Manual
RAM Concept
857
User Manual
c Acp
( )p
At
s
f yv
RAM Concept
858
User Manual
Class T
Class C
Assumed behavior
Uncracked
Cracked
Gross section
Gross section
Cracked
section
f t 7.5 f
Deflection calculation
Gross section
Consider
effects of
cracking
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 / 18.4.4
RAM Concept
7.5 f
859
< f t 12 f
No limit
User Manual
Computation of fs for
crack control
Class U
Class T
Class C
Not applicable
Not applicable
Cracked
section
analysis
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the
provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
860
User Manual
wi = min
540
max f s
2.5cci
432
max f s
2
NumberOfDucts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the
remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first
step.
RAM Concept
861
User Manual
times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
862
User Manual
RAM Concept
863
User Manual
RAM Concept
864
User Manual
56
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
865
User Manual
RAM Concept
866
User Manual
RAM Concept
867
User Manual
RAM Concept
868
User Manual
RAM Concept
869
User Manual
RAM Concept
870
User Manual
RAM Concept
871
User Manual
RAM Concept
872
User Manual
RAM Concept
873
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
874
User Manual
RAM Concept
875
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept 's User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
RAM Concept
876
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
56.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of posttensioned members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
RAM Concept
877
User Manual
RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.3, 18.4.2b,
18.9.3.2
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
56.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
RAM Concept
878
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
56.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Table 38: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
RAM Concept
879
User Manual
RAM Concept
880
User Manual
RAM Concept
881
User Manual
RAM Concept
882
User Manual
c Acp
( )p
At
s
f yv
RAM Concept
883
User Manual
Class T
Class C
Assumed behavior
Uncracked
Cracked
Gross section
Gross section
Cracked section
f t 7.5 f
Deflection calculation
Gross section
Consider effects of
cracking
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 / 18.4.4
Computation of fs for
crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Cracked section
analysis
RAM Concept
7.5 f
884
< f t 12 f
No limit
User Manual
RAM Concept
885
User Manual
wi = min
600, 000
max f
s
2.5cci
480, 000
max f s
2
NumberOfDucts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the
remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first
step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to
36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling
crack width and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
RAM Concept
886
User Manual
times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
887
User Manual
RAM Concept
888
User Manual
RAM Concept
889
User Manual
57
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
890
User Manual
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on
L in ACI 318-08 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live
(Unreducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading, and 1.0 for Live (Parking) Loading.
For the default Load History specification, RAM Concept uses the Service LC: D + L combination for the
maximum load case. This load combination does not contain any roof loads. For floors that contain roof loads, a
more appropriate load combination will need to be specified for the maximum load history step.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis.
Since a load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does not use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such
load combinations in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. In some cases, the
assumption that all gravity loads act in the same direction have been used to keep the number of load
combinations to a minimum. See Specifying Load Combinations on page 109 for further description.
RAM Concept
891
User Manual
RAM Concept
892
User Manual
RAM Concept
893
User Manual
RAM Concept
894
User Manual
RAM Concept
895
User Manual
RAM Concept
896
User Manual
RAM Concept
897
User Manual
RAM Concept
898
User Manual
RAM Concept
899
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
900
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
One-Way Slab
7.12
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
RAM Concept
901
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
57.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
RAM Concept
902
User Manual
RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.3, 18.4.2b,
18.9.3.2
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
RAM Concept
903
User Manual
57.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 43: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.5 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
57.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before
ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 44: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
RAM Concept
904
User Manual
RAM Concept
905
User Manual
RAM Concept
906
User Manual
RAM Concept
907
User Manual
RAM Concept
908
User Manual
c Acp
( )p
At
s
f yv
Assumed behavior
RAM Concept
Class U
Class T
Class C
Uncracked
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
909
User Manual
Class T
Class C
Gross section
Gross section
Cracked section
f t 7.5 f
Deflection calculation
Gross section
Consider effects of
cracking
Consider effects of
cracking
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 / 18.4.4
Computation of fs for
crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
7.5 f
< f t 12 f
No limit
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the
provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
910
User Manual
RAM Concept
911
User Manual
wi = min
600, 000
max f s
2.5cci
480, 000
max f
s
2
NumberOfDucts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the
remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first
step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to
36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling
crack width and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
RAM Concept
912
User Manual
times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross
Lightweight concrete factor is calculated in accordance with 8.6.1 of ACI 318-08. The maximum Wc for the cross
section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
913
User Manual
RAM Concept
914
User Manual
58
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
915
User Manual
RAM Concept
916
User Manual
RAM Concept
917
User Manual
RAM Concept
918
User Manual
RAM Concept
919
User Manual
RAM Concept
920
User Manual
RAM Concept
921
User Manual
RAM Concept
922
User Manual
RAM Concept
923
User Manual
RAM Concept
924
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
925
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
One-Way Slab
7.12
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
RAM Concept
926
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
58.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
RAM Concept
927
User Manual
RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
18.3.3, 18.4.2b
10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.3, 18.4.2b,
18.9.3.2
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
RAM Concept
928
User Manual
58.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 49: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.5 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
58.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 50: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
RAM Concept
929
User Manual
RAM Concept
930
User Manual
RAM Concept
931
User Manual
RAM Concept
932
User Manual
RAM Concept
933
User Manual
c Acp
( )p
At
s
f yv
Assumed behavior
RAM Concept
Class U
Class T
Class C
Uncracked
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
934
User Manual
Class T
Class C
Gross section
Gross section
Cracked section
f t 7.5 f
Deflection calculation
Gross section
Consider effects of
cracking
Consider effects of
cracking
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 / 18.4.4
Computation of fs for
crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
7.5 f
< f t 12 f
No limit
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the
provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
935
User Manual
RAM Concept
936
User Manual
wi = min
600, 000
max f s
2.5cci
480, 000
max f
s
2
NumberOfDucts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the
remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first
step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to
36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling
crack width and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
RAM Concept
937
User Manual
times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
938
User Manual
RAM Concept
939
User Manual
59
AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept s implementation of AS 3600-2001.
The six sections outline the following:
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
940
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
RAM Concept
941
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
942
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
RAM Concept
943
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.4 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
944
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 Material Behaviors
RAM Concept
945
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
fcmi
fcm
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
946
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept
947
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations in Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further information.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
8.1.4.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
59.4.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
948
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
Table 53: Service rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
8.6.2
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
(none)
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
59.4.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
949
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
Table 55: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 8.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
59.4.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 56: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.3
8.1.3
One-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
Two-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
RAM Concept
950
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table
values. Values outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if fc < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 fc; if fc
> 50 MPa, fcm = fc + 6.5 MPa).
This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
RAM Concept
951
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may
exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains
greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM
Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
grade; the engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
The standard strength reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
RAM Concept
952
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
RAM Concept
953
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force
[8.3.6(a) is used for both tension and compression faces]
Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the fitments, etc. that are used to
provide the required torsion capacity.
When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse
closed ties.
Transverse closed ties (Asw ) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max . If T* is greater than Tu,max , then
the section will be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also
met.
Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated for the lesser of T* and Tu,max .
Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion
(no shear).
RAM Concept
954
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional
components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter
of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of
hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
For the max service design:
Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy .
RAM Concept
955
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
RAM Concept
956
User Manual
AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the
spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number
of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the
spacing requirement.
RAM Concept
957
User Manual
60
AS 3600-2009 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept s implementation of AS 3600-2009.
The six sections outline the following:
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
958
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 default load combinations
RAM Concept
959
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 default load combinations
RAM Concept
960
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 default load combinations
Dead Loading: 1.35 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
RAM Concept
961
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 default load combinations
RAM Concept
962
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
963
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 Material Behaviors
Eci =
Ec =
1.50.043 f cmi
f cmi 40 MPa
when
when
f cm 40 MPa
where
fcmi
fcm
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
964
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code rule selection
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
RAM Concept
965
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code rule selection
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations in Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further information.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
8.1.6.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.6.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.6.2
RAM Concept
966
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code rule selection
60.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 59: Service rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
8.6.2
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
(none)
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
RAM Concept
967
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
60.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 61: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 8.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
60.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 62: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.5
8.1.5
One-Way Slab
8.1.5
8.1.5
Two-Way Slab
8.1.5
8.1.5
RAM Concept
968
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
RAM Concept
969
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
RAM Concept s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may
create an over-reinforced section. See Ductility for applying ductility requirements.
If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section
or design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is
designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at
different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam,
these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends
only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for
moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip
segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may
exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains
greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM
Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
RAM Concept does not consider section 17.3.5, which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
grade; the engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
Section 8.1.10 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is partially implemented.
The standard capacity reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
RAM Concept
970
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
RAM Concept
971
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
RAM Concept
972
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
For the max service design:
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy .
Section (d) This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not
protected.
For the service design:
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A)
or Table 8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional
components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter
of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of
hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
For the max service design:
Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy .
RAM Concept
973
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
RAM Concept
974
User Manual
AS 3600-2009 Design
AS 3600-2009 code implementation
Reinforcement is added to try to keep bonded tendon and mild steel stress changes on the tension face within
the values given in Table 9.4.2 as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare
circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress
exceeds 0.25 f c ) this criterion is skipped.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression crosssection strains and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing not exceeding
300 mm or two times the cross section depth. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the
tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if
it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be
optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and
number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
RAM Concept
975
User Manual
61
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
976
User Manual
RAM Concept
977
User Manual
RAM Concept
978
User Manual
61.2.9 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4.
The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) and 1.0 (alt)
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
RAM Concept
979
User Manual
f cui
1.5
f cu
1.5
where
fcui
fcu
=
=
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material
with no stress or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses, four different stress strain curves are used. All four stress-strain curves are
parabolic-linear curves as detailed in. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2fc / Ec ,
where fc is the peak stress and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain.
RAM Concept
980
User Manual
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A
comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
RAM Concept
981
User Manual
RAM Concept
982
User Manual
RAM Concept
983
User Manual
RC
PT - bonded tendons
PT - unbonded tendons
Beam
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.4
4.12.2
RAM Concept
984
User Manual
RC
PT - bonded tendons
PT - unbonded tendons
One-Way Slab
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7
4.12.2
Two-Way Slab
3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7
TR43 / 6.10.6
TR43 / 6.10.6
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations in Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further information.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
RAM Concept
985
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
61.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of posttensioned members as follows:
Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Class 2
Very Corrosive: Class 1
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Table 65: Service rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
RAM Concept
986
User Manual
RC
PT
One-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
61.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Table 66: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
RAM Concept
987
User Manual
61.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 67: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
61.5.7 Accident
Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are
performed if appropriate.
Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, m = 1.3 and for
reinforcement, m = 1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the 0.95fyv (Amendment 1 and 2)
or 0.87fyv (Amendment 3) values are changed to 1.0fyv .
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 68: Accident rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
RAM Concept
988
User Manual
RC
PT
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
RAM Concept
989
User Manual
RAM Concept
990
User Manual
RAM Concept
991
User Manual
RAM Concept
992
User Manual
RAM Concept
993
User Manual
Member
Type
Class
Reinforcement
calculation
Bonded
Beam
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
3 / 0.1 mm
0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
3 / 0.2 mm
0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
3 / 0.1 mm
0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
3 / 0.2 mm
0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
Beam
TR 43, 6.10.5
RAM Concept
994
User Manual
Member
Type
Class
Reinforcement
calculation
Unbonded
Beam
0.36 f cu
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
Beam
3 / 0.1 mm
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
Beam
3 / 0.2 mm
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
One-way
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
One-way
0.36 f cu
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
One-way
3 / 0.1 mm
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
One-way
3 / 0.2 mm
TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded
Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43, 6.10.5
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for grouted post-tensioned tendons
and a 0.1mm crack width are used.
RAM Concept
995
User Manual
RAM Concept
996
User Manual
RAM Concept
997
User Manual
Vc Implementation
M < Mo
Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bvh
M Mo
Vc = (stress)bvh
M Mo
Vc = (stress)bvh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in tension zone)
Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where
the section is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo . For the unusual
case of M Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative
assumptions of column four are made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and posttensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression
fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code.
RAM Concept
998
User Manual
RAM Concept
999
User Manual
2
sb2 + cmin
= sc h t 2sc cmin
) / (3h t 2sc)
RAM Concept
2
(sc h t 2sc cmin )2 / (3h t 2sc )2 cmin
1000
User Manual
RAM Concept
1001
User Manual
62
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
1002
User Manual
RAM Concept
1003
User Manual
RAM Concept
1004
User Manual
RAM Concept
1005
User Manual
RAM Concept
1006
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material
with no stress or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses, three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves
are parabolic-linear curves as detailed in IS456 Fig 21. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear
curve is at 0.002.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is
RAM Concept
1007
User Manual
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A
comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
RAM Concept
1008
User Manual
RAM Concept
1009
User Manual
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in
Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 768 in Section Design Notes. The three parameters are:
Eps' = Eps
Fpy' = Fpy/m
Fpu' = Fpu/m
For strength considerations, a m of 1.15 is used.
For all other considerations a m of 1.0 is used.
This curve is similar but slightly different than the Stress Relieved Curve as shown in IS : 1343 - 1980 Figure 5A
for normal prestressing materials, assuming this curve depicts strain percentage and not actual strains.
RAM Concept
1010
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
26.5.1.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
One-Way Slab
26.5.2.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
Two-Way Slab
26.5.2.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
31.7.1 (456)
31.7.1 (456)
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
RAM Concept
1011
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
62.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
RAM Concept
1012
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
26.3.3/Annex F (456)
22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type
1)
One-Way Slab
26.3.3/Annex F (456)
22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type
1)
Two-Way Slab
26.3.3/Annex F (456)
22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type
1)
Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343
11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width
design is performed for all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1
members as by definition they have no tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for
additional information.
62.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
RAM Concept
1013
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
18.6.3.2c (1343)
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion
design notes)
62.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
RAM Concept
1014
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
One-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
Two-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
RAM Concept
1015
User Manual
0.0035
0.0055 +
where
y
RAM Concept
1016
User Manual
RAM Concept
1017
User Manual
RAM Concept
1018
User Manual
Environment:
Protected - 0.3 mm
Normal - 0.3 mm
Corrosive - 0.2 mm
Very corrosive - 0.1 mm
These limits are specified in IS 456 clause 35.3.2. They are applied to post-tensioned members as well (except
type 1) even though they do not match the limiting crack width values for Type 3 in Table 8. This results in a
crack width limit design to 0.3 mm for Type 3 members and a crack width limit design to 0.2 mm for Type 2
members. This crack width design is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3 since bar spacing limits have
not been specifically applied.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way
slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the
balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, the equation can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrm ) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= m Sc
Sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing.
Bars and tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht]
where
ht
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in
controlling cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face
width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar
diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
RAM Concept
1019
User Manual
RAM Concept
1020
User Manual
Vc Implementation
M < Mo
Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bh
M Mo
Vc = (stress)bh
RAM Concept
1021
User Manual
Vc Implementation
M Mo
Vc = (stress)bh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in tension zone)
Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where
the section is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo . For the unusual
case of M Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative
assumptions of column four are made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and posttensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression
fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code.
dt is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the
tendons, whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the
determination of Ap used in the calculation of vc .
b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and
two-thirds of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to
determine Ap used in Table 6.
When calculating fpe /fpu , fpe is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of
prestressing steel.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6.
For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate.
Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456
40.2.3.1.
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3.
Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when Vu > Vc .
The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the
core width is made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each
containing only one web.
RAM Concept
1022
User Manual
RAM Concept
1023
User Manual
=
=
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular
to the cross section considered.
RAM Concept
1024
User Manual
RAM Concept
1025
User Manual
63
RAM Concept
1026
User Manual
RAM Concept
1027
User Manual
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
1028
User Manual
RAM Concept
1029
User Manual
RAM Concept
1030
User Manual
RAM Concept
1031
User Manual
RAM Concept
1032
User Manual
63.2.12 Accident LC
This load combination is intended for checking the accident limit state. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
1033
User Manual
RAM Concept
1034
User Manual
RAM Concept
1035
User Manual
RAM Concept
1036
User Manual
63.2.22 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:
Domestic, residential, and office (Category A and B) loads on a Live (Reducible) layer
Assembly (Category C and D) loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Car park loads (Category F) on a Live (Parking) layer
Storage loads(Category E) on a Live (Storage) layer.
Roof loads (Category H) on a Live (Roof) layer
Note: Live load reduction will conservatively not be considered on Assembly loads in Category C and D. However
it is necessary to assign the loads to the Live (Unreducible) type to get the appropriate factors in the load
combinations.
RAM Concept
1037
User Manual
=
=
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material
with no stress or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are
parabolic-linear curves as detailed in clause 3.1.7. The transition strain is at c2 .
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is
0.85fck / (SLS)c
(c = 1.0 for UK National Annex)
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.85fck / (SLS)c
(c = 1.0 for UK National Annex)
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.85fck / (ULS)c
(c = 1.5 for UK National Annex)
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of cu2 . The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked crosssection strain analyses use the stress strain curve of Figure 3.3. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will
therefore be different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR
calculations.
RAM Concept
1038
User Manual
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in
Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 768 . The three parameters are:
Eps = Eps
Fpy = Fpy / m
Fpu = Fpu / m
For strength considerations, (ULS) s is used (s = 1.15 for UK National Annex).
For other considerations (accidental LS or SLS), s is used ( s = 1.0 for UK National Annex).
RAM Concept
1039
User Manual
PT
Beam
9.2.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
One-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
Two-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
Beam
9.2.1.1
One-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
9.3.1.1
Two-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
9.3.1.1
Design System
UK National Annex
RAM Concept
1040
User Manual
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
one load combination.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations in Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further information.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
RAM Concept
1041
User Manual
PC
RT
Beam
(none)
One-Way Slab
(none)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
5.10.2.2
UK National Annex
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
7.2 (2)
7.2 (2)
7.2(5)1
7.2 (5)
7.2 (5)1
7.2 (2)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (5)1
UK National Annex
Beam
One-Way Slab
RAM Concept
1042
7.2(5)1
User Manual
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
Two-Way Slab
7.2 (2)
7.2 (2)
7.2(5)1
7.2 (5)
7.2 (5)1
TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
Generic National Annex
All systems
7.2 (2)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (2)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (5)
7.2 (5)
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.2(5) is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
(none)
7.31
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.72
7.31
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.72
UK National Annex
Beam
One-Way Slab
RAM Concept
(none)
1043
User Manual
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
Two-Way Slab
(none)
7.31
TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
Generic National Annex
All Systems
(none)
7.3
(none)
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
7.3
7.32
7.31
7.3
7.32
7.3
UK National Annex
All systems
Generic National Annex
All systems
Note: 1- for Unbonded PT members, 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2- for Bonded PT members, only the decompression design is applied for the appropriate exposure.
RAM Concept
1044
User Manual
63.4.7 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 82: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3
6.1
6.1
6.2
6.2
6.3
6.3
UK National Annex
All systems
63.4.8 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 83: Ductility rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
All Systems
5.5
5.5
RAM Concept
1045
User Manual
63.4.9 Accident
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For reinforcement m = 1.0 (BS EN 1990:2002).
Reinforcement location is determined by the Min. Reinforcement Location setting.
The minimum tensile force that an internal tie is capable of resisting varies between the BS EN 1990-2002
and the Generic version, which uses the Eurocode general recommendation.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 84: Accident rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
All Systems
9.10
9.10
RAM Concept
1046
User Manual
RAM Concept
1047
User Manual
RAM Concept
1048
User Manual
The above limitations effectively create a truss wall with a longitudinal bar located at the center of the wall or
outside the center of the wall (which is considered to be conservative). In these calculations RAM Concept
assumes that the side cover to the longitudinal bars is the maximum of the top and bottom cover.
If the interaction equation 6.31 is satisfied, only minimum reinforcement is provided.
If equation 6.31 is not satisfied, equation 6.29 is used to calculate a maximum shear capacity by deducting the
torsion portion of the interaction capacity. This equation is used to iteratively solve for the smallest value of
theta that can satisfy the interaction equation 6.29. This theta is then used in all subsequent shear and torsion
calculations.
Maximum spacing of links is calculated in accordance with 9.2.3(3).
Minimum torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with 9.2.3(2).
Minimum longitudinal tension reinforcement is calculated in accordance with equation 6.28. The tension
demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected compression chord force.
If torsion design is selected and the torsion is greater than zero, at least minimum links will be provided.
RAM Concept
1049
User Manual
[ ( s / p )]
1=
= 0.5 for fck C50/60
RAM Concept
1050
User Manual
RAM Concept
1051
User Manual
RAM Concept
1052
User Manual
RAM Concept
1053
User Manual
Exposure
Class
Supplementa Load
Combination
l
Reinforceme
nt
Calculation
Bonded
Beam, One
Way Slab
X0, XC1
0.2
0.2
1.65fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
Frequent1,2
XC2, XC3,
XC4
0.2
0.2
1.65fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
Frequent1,2,
QuasiPermanent3
XD or XS
0.2
0.1
1.35fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
RAM Concept
1054
Frequent1,2,
User Manual
Member
Type
Exposure
Class
Supplementa Load
Combination
l
Reinforceme
nt
Calculation
Unbonded
Beam, One
Way Slab
All
0.3
1.35fctm
5.8.7
Frequent2,
QuasiPermanent1
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm
(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Characterist
ic2,Frequent
Bonded
X0, XC1
Two Way
Slab, Full
Panel Width
Bonded
Two Way
Slab,
Column/
Middle
Strips
XC2, XC3,
XC4
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm
(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Characterist
ic2,Frequent
1, QuasiPermanent3
XD or XS
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm
(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Characterist
ic2,Frequent
1,3
X0, XC1
0.2
0(support)
1.2fctm
(span)
1.2fctm
5.8.7
Frequent1,2
XC2, XC3,
XC4
0.2
0(support)
1.2fctm
(span)
1.2fctm
5.8.7
Frequent1,2,
QuasiPermanent3
XD or XS
0.2
0(support)
1.2fctm
(span)
1.2fctm
5.8.7
0(support)
0.3fctm
(span)
0.9fctm
All
Unbonded
Two Way
Slab, Full
Panel Width
RAM Concept
0.3
1055
Frequent1,2,
5.8.7
Characterist
ic2,QuasiPermanent1
User Manual
Member
Type
Exposure
Class
Supplementa Load
Combination
l
Reinforceme
nt
Calculation
Unbonded
Two Way
Slab,
Column/
Middle
Strips
All
0.3
5.8.7
0(support)
0.4fctm
(span)
1.2fctm
Frequent2,
QuasiPermanent1
63.5.13 TR-43 5.8.2 PT Initial Service (transfer) Stresses (UK National Annex Only)
This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs.
For beams and one-way slabs, where the flexural tensile stresses exceed 0.72fctm additional un-tensioned
reinforcement is designed in accordance with 5.8.7. Compressive stresses are limited to the values in 5.8.2.
For two-way slabs, the flexural compressive and tensile stresses are limited to the values in Table 5 for column/
middle strip design, or Table 4 for full panel width design, where fck is replaced with fcki .
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fck is used to determine the limit stress and the peak
stress reported may be approximate.
RAM Concept
1056
User Manual
=
=
=
=
=
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete
cover is specified.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular
to the cross section considered.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
1057
User Manual
RAM Concept
1058
User Manual
64
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
RAM Concept
1059
User Manual
RAM Concept
1060
User Manual
RAM Concept
1061
User Manual
RAM Concept
1062
User Manual
RAM Concept
1063
User Manual
RAM Concept
1064
User Manual
assembly loads less than 4.8 kPa (or important live loads) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
assembly loads of 4.8 kPa or more, manufacturing, retail stores, garages, or footbridge on Live (Parking) layer
storage areas, and equipment areas and service rooms referred to in Table 4.1.5.3 on Live (Storage) layer
live loads other than those covered by clause 4.1.5.9 sentences 1) and 2) on a Live (Reducible) layer
RAM Concept
1065
User Manual
1.5
c
2, 300
c
2, 300
1.5
where
fci
fc
c
=
=
=
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 772 for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
RAM Concept
1066
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.7
One-Way Slab
7.8
18.7
Two-Way Slab
7.8
(none)
RAM Concept
1067
User Manual
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
RAM Concept s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
on load combination.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations in Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further information.
Related Links
Rebuilding load combinations on page 111
RAM Concept
1068
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
One-Way Slab
(none)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
Note: 18.3.1.1(c) is not considered. 18.3.1.1(b) is considered in all cases for tension.
64.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure
category of members as follows:
Protected: Partial PT/RC, interior exposure
Normal: Partial PT/RC, exterior exposure
Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(c)
Very Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(d)
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 87: Service rule mapping
Design System
RC
Partial PT
Full PT 18.3.2(c)
Full PT 18.3.2(d)
Beam
10.6.1
18.8.1, 18.8.3
18.8.1, 18.3.2(c)
18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)
One-Way Slab
10.6.1
18.8.1, 18.8.3
18.8.1, 18.3.2(c)
18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(not applicable)
18.8.1, 18.3.2(c)
18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)
RAM Concept
1069
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.3.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.2a
64.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
See Torsion Considerations for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 89: Strength rule mapping
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
One-Way Slab
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
Two-Way Slab
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
Note: * - 11.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
64.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
RAM Concept
1070
User Manual
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.2
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.5.2
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.5.2
(none)
RAM Concept
1071
User Manual
RAM Concept
1072
User Manual
RAM Concept
1073
User Manual
RAM Concept
1074
User Manual
RAM Concept
1075
User Manual
ci
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
RAM Concept
1076
User Manual
RAM Concept
1077
User Manual
times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f c for the cross
Type of Tendon
Member Type
Type of Tendon
Bonded
Unbonded
Bonded
Unbonded
Beam
0.004A
0.003A
0.005A
One-way Slab
0.003A
0.002A
0.004A
Two-way negative
moment regions
0.006hln
0.0045hln
0.0075hln
Two-way positive
moment regions
0.004A
0.003A
0.005A
n/a
n/a
> 0.2 f
Two-way positive
moment regions
< 0.2 f
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
RAM Concept
1078
User Manual
RAM Concept
1079
User Manual
65
Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete members using elastic methods with
modifications made for some of the factors listed above.
Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so elastic deflection calculation
methods have generally been acceptable. The increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection
calculations more important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors usually undergo more extensive
cracking than post-tensioned floors, which is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more
consideration of deflection issues.
More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete sections) require a more rigorous analysis
to determine that the deflection limit states are satisfactory. The aggressive designer must, however, have a
thorough understanding of the methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections.
In particular, if the designer pushes the floor design to the limit then problems may occur due to issues that are
unforeseen or not considered by RAM Concept . These include:
poor placement of reinforcement (less effective depth resulting in more cracking)
vibrations (dynamic effects are not considered by RAM Concept )
RAM Concept
1080
User Manual
Each load history step represents an applied load combination for a specified duration of time. Each load history
step is solved in sequence, taking into consideration the effects from all previous load history steps. For
instantaneous load steps the duration can be specified as zero. The specified sequence of load steps makes up
the entire load history. The total age at the end of each load history step is reported as a read only value in the
table.
In order to calculate load history results, span segments and design sections must be specified such that each
finite element with significant stress is covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section or design section
oriented appropriately for the element stress. For one-way slabs, this could be achieved by defining span
segments in the spanning direction only. For two-way slabs, span segments should be specified in orthogonal
directions to cover the entire slab. Since the load history deflection detailed calculations are carried out on the
cross sections and subsequently used to adjust element stiffness, omission of span segments or design sections
in highly stressed regions will result in an inaccurate and potentially unconservative prediction of deflections.
RAM Concept s load history deflection calculations do not directly consider the effects from specified patterns,
from live load reduction, or from alternate load factors.
Since the load history calculations can be time consuming, they are performed separately from other
) command. The
calculations in RAM Concept . They are invoked using the Calc Load History Deflections (
button will only be active if load steps are specified in the Load History criteria page and if the current load
history results are out of date.
Results
The results for each load history step are available in the load history folder on the report tree. The results
stored on each load history step represent the state of the structure at the end of the load history step.
Additional load history steps can be added at any desired interval in order to calcuate results at any particular
age of interest.
RAM Concept
1081
User Manual
3.
4.
5.
6.
RAM Concept
1082
User Manual
65.3.2 Creep
Creep strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total creep as a
function of time. The creep model presented in ACI 209R-92 is utilized in RAM Concept s load history
calculations. The creep value input in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog should represent the
final ultimate creep value and should take into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can
reflect any considerations required by regional building codes. The ACI model is only used to predict the
percentage of total creep as a function of time. The modification factor la to account for initial load application
times other than 7 days is automatically included in RAM Concept s load history calculations and should not be
incorporated into the input creep value.
Creep strains are assumed to be a linear factor of the initial load induced elastic strain for a particular load. In
order to consider loads that are applied at different times, the assumption is made that creep strains of like or
opposing signs can be superimposed. These assumptions are likely reasonable for the normal range of service
loads.
An ageing coefficient is used as a modifier of creep to account for the rate of application loading, its effect on
the creep and the variation of concrete strength over the time period. While the rigorous calculation of the
coefficient is rather involved, this value can normally be taken as 0.8 with little loss in accuracy.
65.3.3 Shrinkage
Shrinkage strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total
shrinkage as a function of time. The shrinkage model presented in ACI 209R-92 for moist curing is utilized in
RAM Concept s load history calculations. The shrinkage value input in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc
Options dialog should represent the final ultimate shrinkage and should take into account concrete mix,
environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by regional building codes. The
ACI model is only used to predict the percentage of total shrinkage as a function of time. The modification factor
cp to account for moist curing durations other than 7 days is automatically included in RAM Concept s load
history calculations and should not be incorporated into the input shrinkage value.
65.3.4 Cracking
When a flexural load or shrinkage causes the applied tensile stresses to exceed the cracking stress, the stress is
relieved at that location and a redistribution of stress occurs with a resulting increase in cross section curvature.
As load increases, the number of cracks also increases. In the cross section calculations, at the crack locations the
concrete is assumed to carry no tension. In the regions between the cracks the bonded tension reinforcement
transfers tension back into the concrete. This phenomenon is normally referred to as tension stiffening. In a
partially cracked concrete member the mean curvature over a region lies between the uncracked curvature and
the curvature at the crack locations. A number of models exist for predicting the tension stiffening behavior. The
tension stiffening model presented in the Eurocode 2-2004 is utilized in RAM Concept s load history calculations
utilizing a long term factor. See Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio for additional information. The
modulus of rupture for the design Code in use is used for the concrete flexural tension strength in the tension
stiffening equation.
RAM Concept
1083
User Manual
RAM Concept
1084
User Manual
65.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term
Deflection results plotted for the strip?
Because the methodology is entirely different, the results between the load history calculations will sometimes
differ from the long-term deflections plotted on the strip. It is common for the load history deflections to be
larger or smaller than the strip based long-term deflections. Some of the primary differences are outlined here.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be larger than strip based long-term
deflections are:
Redistribution of forces is considered, which can lead to a more realistic prediction of cracking in the
structure. Cracking in one region can lead to increased forces in adjacent regions (either laterally or along the
span) which can in turn lead to additional cracking throughout the structure.
Stresses induced in the uncracked concrete due to shrinkage being restrained by the reinforcement or by
specifying a Shrinkage Restraint % are considered in the cracking and tension stiffening calculations.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be smaller than strip based long-term
deflections are:
Compression reinforcement is always considered, whether the cross section is actually cracked or not.
Uncracked transformed properties are used where the cross section is not cracked.
Load history is taken into consideration. If the maximum load is not sustained through the duration of the
calculation, the load history calculations will take this into consideration.
RAM Concept
1085
User Manual
RAM Concept
1086
User Manual
66
RAM Concept
1087
User Manual
RAM Concept
1088
User Manual
RAM Concept
1089
User Manual
Figure 520: Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
RAM Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical
sections. The method that RAM Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find
them. You should always visually inspect the locations of the critical sections that RAM Concept has checked to
see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching
Shear Status Plan).
RAM Concept
1090
User Manual
RAM Concept
1091
User Manual
66.3 Using RAM Concept 's results to specify stud shear reinforcement
(SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support,
first stud spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties.
Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects >
Punch Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by RAM Concept but can be easily determined from
the geometry. Generally, the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural
member's outer surfaces (while observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). RAM Concept 's
strength calculations assume that each individual shear stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the
thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud rail. A punching design may have shear
stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
For the Ancon Shearfix system design, the input covers are used to calculate a physical rail depth and used to
generate the Ancon part numbers shown in the punching report.
RAM Concept
1092
User Manual
Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in2
bo = total length of the critical section, in.
b1 = width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are determined, in.
b2 = width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1, in.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, as outlined in
ACI 318, in.
Ixx = moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical section, in4
I xx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated
with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in4
I yy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated
with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4
RAM Concept
1093
User Manual
I xy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the
centroid of the critical section, in4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column
utilizing a right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column
utilizing a right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
Mux = column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
Muy = column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
vu = shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi
Vu = axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive,
kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
u =
Vu
bo d
( y point
y vx M ux I yy + vy M uy I xy
2
I xx I yy I xy
( x point x )
b. M ux = M ox + V u ( ycol y )
vy M uy I xx + vx M ux I xy
2
I xx I yy I xy
c. M uy = M oy + V u ( xcol x )
d.
e.
I xx =
I yy =
RAM Concept
I xx
I yy
sides=1
n
sides=1
1094
User Manual
I xy =
I xx =
I yy =
I xy =
sides=1
dL 3
12
dL 3
12
dL 3
12
I xy
sin 2 ( ) + Ld ( y y side ) 2
cos 2 ( ) + Ld ( x x side ) 2
sin ( ) cos ( ) + Ld(x x side )( y y side )
j. = 1
v
1
1+
2
3
b1
b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section.
If the moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the
more familiar:
vu =
Vu
bo d
vx M ux ( y point y )
Ix
vy M uy ( x point x )
Iy
RAM Concept
1095
User Manual
per ACI 318-05 11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to vn = 8 f c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 of a
higher limit for vn . The higher limit is also applied to all sections in the ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 standards.
Sections with unreinforced stresses larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
vs
Av
daveRail
vs,min
=
=
=
RAM Concept
1096
User Manual
(13.3.7.3)
where
vc
0.28c f
vs
(13.3.8.3)
Note: This equation has been extended from CSA equation 13-11 to
approximately account for the situation where different rails at a
column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
Avs
daveRail
RAM Concept
=
=
1097
User Manual
13.3.7.4. For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, v is adjusted in accordance with ACI
421.1R-99 Appendix B.
The minimum rail length is 2d in accordance with 13.3.7.4.
RAM Concept
1098
User Manual
f cv + 0.3cp
Where Mv * is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.2.4a when there
are no closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams:
Vu =
1+
V uo
*
uM v
*
8V adom
This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of Mv * and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This
equation can be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
*
Mv
2
8adom
*
V
udom
f cv + 0.3cp
The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion
strips. RAM Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum
closed ties in accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.2.4b. RAM Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum
ties required by this clause, which must be calculated and included by the Engineer.
When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.2.4b is used:
1.2V uo
Vu =
1+
*
uM v
* 2
2V a
*
V
1.2udom
f cv + 0.3cp
In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is
possible for the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without.
RAM Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
f cv = 0.17 1 +
2
h
0.34 f
and cp is the average prestress in the punching check region. If cp results in tension it reduces the allowable
stress. The reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by = 0.7.
For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1. The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated.
2. The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is
calculated for bending about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
RAM Concept
1099
User Manual
( )( )
Ks
1
V uo
Avs
b
fvy
d
u
=
=
=
=
=
Avs f vy
d
s
u
b
V uo
*
uM v
1
+
*
1 + Kt
8V adom
where
RAM Concept
( )( )
Kt
1
V uo
Avt f vy
d
s
u
a
1100
User Manual
0.35bs
f vy
Avs =
0.06 f c bs
f vy
(for AS 3600-2009)
In the torsion strip,
Avs =
0.35as
f vy
Avs =
0.06 f c as
f vy
(for AS 3600-2009)
When SSR reinforcement is required, the minimum quantity of reinforcement is required on all strength strips.
RAM Concept
1101
User Manual
The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid.
k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes.
The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors.
The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
RAM Concept
1102
User Manual
b + d
b + c
area a
area c
a + c
area d
a + b
area b
Area a
Area b
Area c
Area d
The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as:
b = -x a
Equation 1
d = -y c
Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section:
M ox = unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
M oy = unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
d = effective depth at location in critical section
M ox = aady d l + bbdy d l + c c dy d l + d d dy d l
Substituting equations 1 and 2 and collecting terms,
M ox = a ady d l bx dy d l + c c dy d l d y dy d l
Equation 3
M ox = a adx d l bx dx d l + c c dx d l d x dy d l
Equation 4
RAM Concept
1103
User Manual
M ox Z yy + M oy Z xy
Z xx Z yy Z xy Z yx
M oy Z xx M ox Z yx
Z xx Z yy Z xy Z yx
c =
For symmetric sections, Zxy and Zyx are equal to zero and the equations above reduce to:
a =
a =
M ox
Z xx
M oy
Z yy
V Ed
ud
+ a/b + c /d
=
=
fck
k1
cp
=
=
=
0.18/c
1+
200
d
2.0d , d in mm
When 1 is automatically calculated for use in equation 6.47, the following apply :
Reinforcement ratios are calculated about each punch check axis individually.
A distance 3d beyond the column width is used.
Only user reinforcement is considered (program reinforcement is not used). Once the flexural design is
completed the program reinforcement can be changed to user reinforcement to perform the auto calculation.
Untensioned reinforcement on the specified face (top or bottom) only is considered (bonded tendons are
excluded).
Vector components of user reinforcement are used.
RAM Concept
1104
User Manual
(6.52)
where
dsw
sr
Asw
di
fywd
di
=
=
=
=
=
=
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield
strength of the SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to
make reductions to the effective yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made
by specifying a reduced yield stress in the SSR Systems on the Materials page.
(6.53)
where
vEd
vRd,max
v
fcd
u0
=
=
=
=
=
=
VEd/(u0d)
0.5fcd
maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u1
0.6[1 - fck/250] fck in N/mm2
design value of concrete compressive strength
length of column or loaded area periphery.
For edge columns, u0 6d
For corner columns, u0 3d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for
irregular situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the
Engineer as necessary.
Miscellaneous Provisions
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost
perimeter of shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter.
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d.
RAM Concept
1105
User Manual
Y
X
Figure 522: Positive moment reactions derived from the right-hand rule sign convention.
RAM Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and
moments that would need to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the
columns were removed. This can be envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with
the reported reactions applied at the column centroid. Refer to the following figure for clarification.
RAM Concept
1106
User Manual
RAM Concept
1107
User Manual
RAM Concept
1108
User Manual
67
) command.
RAM Concept
1109
User Manual
RAM Concept
1110
User Manual
67.1.2 Damping
Real structures have some level of damping which tends to reduce the vibratory response over time. The higher
the damping, the faster the vibration will decay and the less likely vibrations will cause adverse affects. Damping
is often defined as a fraction of critical damping, which is the level of damping that would be necessary to
prevent oscillation altogether. In RAM Concept a constant damping ratio is used in the calculation of all modes.
Typical damping ratios for concrete structures range from about 0.01 to 0.02 (1% to 2% of critical) for bare
concrete floors, and 0.02 to 0.035 (2% to 3.5% of critical) for concrete floors with typical fit out.
p(t) = Wsin
j=1
t)
( j2
T
where
RAM Concept
=
=
1111
User Manual
=
=
This relationship is demonstrated graphically below for a walking frequency of 1.5 Hz:
Figure 525: Assumed footfall forcing function built up from harmonic components
In the resonant analysis, a maximum natural frequency to use in the analysis can be input into RAM Concept .
Only modes of vibration with natural frequencies less than or equal to the input value will be used in the
resonant response analysis.
RAM Concept
1112
User Manual
RAM Concept
1113
User Manual
1 T
v (t )2
T 0
dt
RAM Concept
1114
User Manual
Excitation at
Critical Nodes
This option first does a preliminary analysis on every node in the structure, calculating
results at only the excitation point and using the simplified (fast) analysis to find a
response factor at each node. Then, only nodes with a calculated response factor greater
than or equal to the entered Excitation response factor threshold are excited in the
primary analysis.
Excitation at
Specified Nodes
Excitation area polygons can be drawn on the Excitation Areas Plan (on the Vibration
Layer). Only the nodes of any elements intersected by the drawn excitation area polygons
are considered as excitation nodes. This option works in conjunction with other
excitation area options. For example, if an excitation area is drawn and Excitation at
Critical Nodes is specified, only nodes that both intersect the excitation area and have a
preliminary response factor greater than or equal to the Excitation response factor
threshold will be excited. If no excitation areas are drawn, every node is considered as an
excitation node.
Response at All
DOF at All Nodes
When using Modal Analysis, this option calculates the response at all DOF (lateral,
angular, vertical) at all nodes. Since the lateral and angular components are rarely critical
for floor vibrations and calculating these components increases the run time, using this
option is not normally recommended.
Response at
This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at every node. As each node is
Vertical DOF at All being considered as an excitation node, the response at all other nodes in the structure is
Nodes
calculated and enveloped.
Response at
This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at the excited node only. As
Vertical DOF at
each node is being considered as an excitation node, the response is calculated at the
Only Excited Node excitation node and is not calculated at any other node.
RAM Concept
1115
User Manual
Description of Use
Workshops, Office
8-10
Residential
4-8
Operating rooms
1-4
0.0625-1
RAM Concept
1116
User Manual
Figure 526: Vibration base curve for RMS acceleration (response factor = 1)
RAM Concept
1117
User Manual
Index
Symbols
"core" determination
concrete 779
Numerics
3.12.11.2.1
bar spacing 992
318-02
code span detailing rules
796
development lengths 799
318-05
code span detailing rules
796
development lengths 799
318-08
code span detailing rules
796
development lengths 799
318-11
code span detailing rules
796
development lengths 799
RAM Concept
1118
User Manual
appearance schemes
creating new 70
deleting 70
setting for a perspective 69
setting for a plan 69
application data
ISM 139
Application Window Layout 54
area loads
drawing 194
properties 193
area spring locations
defining 715
area spring properties
defining 715
area springs
drawing 165, 186
properties 163, 186
AS 3600
punching shear design
10981101
AS 3600 - 2001
code span detailing rules
797
AS 3600 - 2009
code span detailing rules
797
AS 3600 2001
developement lengths
800802
AS 3600-2001
code implementation 950
code rule selection 946
default load combinations
941
default loadings 940
design 940
material behaviors 945
AS 3600-2009
code implementation 968
code rule selection 965
default load combinations
959
default loadings 958
design 958
material behaviors 963
AS/NZS 1170.1
RAM Concept
backup copies
reverting to 57
Balance loading
1119
User Manual
orthotropic 748
wall 758
bending moment contours
viewing 335
bending moments
viewing 468
bottom reinforcement mats
drawing 470
Branson's formula 774
BS 6399-1
live load factors 980
BS 8110
code rule selection 984
default load combinations
977
default loadings 976
development lengths 802
live load factors 980
material behaviors 980
specific options 266
BS 8110 - 1997
code span detailing rules
797
BS 8110:1997
design 976
BS8110
code implementation 989
BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 220
building codes
knowing 52
CAD drawings
importing 473
CAD Drawings
using 122
CAD files
importing 122, 516, 554,
590, 634, 672, 713
Cal Options
reviewing 504, 581
calc log
reviewing 329
Calc Log
opening 329
calc options
RAM Concept
1120
User Manual
creating 141
Concept model
updating
changing 143
Concept slabs
exporting to ISM 146
concrete
behavior 827, 849, 874, 899,
924
concrete behavior
AS 3600-2001 945
AS 3600-2009 963
BS 8110 980
CSA 1065
EC2 1037
IS 456 1007
concrete form
examples that should use
ignore depth 260,
261
concrete members
importing 124
concrete mix
specifying material
properties 96
connecting walls
drawing 405
connections
about type 1092
considerations
special member 791
consistency checking
about 391
construction loadings
temporary 821, 841, 865,
890, 915, 940, 958,
976, 1002, 1028,
1059
contour plots
acceleration 1116
velocity 1116
conventions
sign 762
coordinate points
entering 74
copies
number of 378
RAM Concept
1121
damping 1110
data transfer paths 136
data transfers
from ISM 139
from STAAD 136
databases
exporting to the RAM
Structural System
389
importing 127
importing from the RAM
Structural System
127
reimporting 130
dead load reactions
viewing 335
dead loadings
+ 0.25 live load load
combination 823
other, defining 483, 564,
600, 644, 682, 719
UBC 831
deep beams
analysis of
with transverse
bending
moments
753
analysis of for bending
moment and shear
752
considerations 749
design
with transverse
bending
moments
753
design of for bending
moment shear 752
with torsion
analysis of 755
default load combinations
about 109
default loadings
about 100
User Manual
default properties
setting 81
default schemes
setting new 70
deflection
viewing 464
deflections
load history 439
questions about 432
sustained, viewing 551, 629,
669, 708
viewing 334
design
about the three steps 366
design approach
general 768
design flexural resistance
section 18.7 837
design issues
questions about 424
design notes
section 768
design reinforcement
looking at 508, 549, 584,
623, 702
design rules
choosing 118
selecting 118
design section
forces 762
design sections
defining 257
drawing 259
properties 257
understanding parameters
263
using 257
design status
looking at 506, 548, 619,
731
design statuses
looking at 583
design strip
forces 762
design strip cross sections
viewing a perspective 227
design strips
RAM Concept
1122
drawing 300
formatting options 306
properties 294
distribution plots
axial force 343
section 340
selected 343
shear 342
summary of 343
drawing
precision, with snaps 73
drawings
importing 122
making visible on other
plans 123
showing on the mesh input
554
showing on the mesh input
layer 473, 516, 590,
634, 672, 713
verifying 122
viewing 122
drop caps
adding 399, 738
drawing 476, 519, 557, 593,
637, 675
properties 399
drop panels
adding 399
properties 399
ductility
non prestressed 856
non-prestressed 833
prestressed 838
section 10.3.3 833
section 18.8.1 838
EC2
code implementation 1046
code rule selection 1040
code span detailing rules
798
default load combinations
1028
default loadings 1028
User Manual
design 1026
development lengths 804
material behaviors 1037
specific options 266
ECR
, See effective curve ratio
RAM Concept
process 390
export reactions access
about 391
export stories
checks performed after
choosing 392
checks performed before
choosing 391
1123
general parameters
specifying 396
geometry
exporting to the RAM
Structural System
393
grid settings
changing for a plan 72
grids
changing settings for a plan
72
setting up 71
User Manual
IBC 2003
live load factors 826
IBC 2006
live load factors 873
IBC 2009
live load factors 899
ignore depth
concrete form examples
260, 261
ignore depths
about 260
effects on reinforcement
location 263
when to use 260
import perimeters
definition of 125
imported drawings
checking for correct scale
122
importing
databases 127
impulsive responses
RMS values for 1114
in-plane behavior
about 742, 743
interaction of 746
in-plane stiffnesses
interaction of 749
influence area
calculations 782
influence areas
RAM Concept
examples of 783
information
viewing all on one plan 413
initial compressive stress limit
section 18.4.1a 836
initial tensile stress limit
section 18.4.1b 836
Instability 748
inter cross sections
slope limit trimming 231
interfaces
RAM Concept 136
introduction 49
irregular column layouts
laying out design strips 234
irregular grids
examples 240
IS 1343
code implementation 1020
default loadings 1002
IS 1343:1980
design 1002
IS 456
code implementation 1015
code rule selection 1010
default load combinations
1002
default loadings 1002
material behaviors 1007
IS 456 - 2000
code span detailing rules
798
IS 456-2000
development lengths 803
IS 456:2000
design 1002
IS 875
live load factors 1007
ISM
about 139
application data 139
Concept rebar, exporting
153
Concept slabs, exporting to
146
creating repository 140
data transfer from 139
1124
jacks
about 314
properties 314
joist
systems 398
K Factors 748
User Manual
RAM Concept
line springs
drawing 163, 186
properties 163, 185
line supports
about 160, 183
drawing 161
drawing on slab elements
184
properties 161, 184
using to refine the mesh 178
line type
changing 69
lines
drawing 82
too short at (x,y) 435
live load factors
ACI 318-02 848
ASCE-7 848
IBC 2003 848
live load reactions
viewing 335
live load reduction
about 316
column properties 158
for loadings 781
ICB 2003 788
implementation of 319
notes 781
options 316
parameters 318
using 316
live load reduction code
setting 317
live load reduction parameters
specifying 318
live load reductions
AS/NZA 1170.1-2002 790
ASCE-7 2002 787
ASCE-7 2010 788
BS 6399-1:1996 790
Eurocode 1 part 1-1
UK national annex
1037
Eurocode 1-2002 (UK
Annex) 791
for load combinations 781
for loadings 781
1125
User Manual
RAM Concept
1126
User Manual
RAM Concept
1127
NBC 2005
live load factors 1065
new perspectives
creating 65
node options
excitation 1114
response 1114
nodes
deleting from a polygonal
object 78
User Manual
object numbers
showing 434
object properties
editing 81
objects
appending to the layer
clipboard 77
copying 76
copying by layer 77
copying using relative
coordinates 407
cutting 76
deselecting 75
deselecting a group from a
selection 75
deselecting a single from a
selection 76
deselecting from a selection
75
drawing 73, 74
editing 73
editing polygon 77
filtering selected 76
hiding on a perspective 68
hiding on a plan 68
mirroring 78
modeling with 60
moving 78
moving by one of its grips
79
moving using relative
coordinates 407
pasting 76
pasting by layer 77
pasting from clipboard 76
pasting from the layer
clipboard 77
rotating 78
selecting 75
selecting a group of 75
selecting a single 75
showing on a perspective 68
showing on a plan 68
stretching 78
RAM Concept
page orientation
setting 382
pages
range 378
viewing multiple at once
382
panning
to reposition 66
paper
size 379
source 379
parameters
detailing 324
general, setting 735
Partition Loading
special handling during
export 390
1128
paths
data transfer 136
pattern loading factors
default 976
pattern loadings
creating 196
PDFs
printing to 378
performance
questions about 432
perimeter line loads
drawing 193
perspectives
creating new 65
customizing printed
appearances o 383
questions about 412, 413
using 64
viewing 64
plans
adding 407
creating new 64
creating new that plot
latitude bottom
reinforcement 460
customizing printed
appearances of 383
deleting unwanted 412
determining fit of 380
determining which contain
objects 62
exporting 387
questions about 412, 413
reducing information shown
on 408
using 64
viewing all information on
one 413
plate behavior
review of 742
plot controls
difference 364
plot settings
changing 338
plot sign conventions
about 92
plot values
User Manual
distribution 340
plots
questions about 425
plotted results
setting 348
plotting results
vibration analysis 362
point loads
drawing 191
properties 191
point springs
drawing 162, 185
properties 162, 185
point supports
about 160, 183
drawing 160, 184
properties 160, 183
using to refine the mesh 178
polygon objects
editing 77
polygon slab mesh areas
drawing 188
polygonal objects
adding a node to 78
nodes
adding to a
polygonal
object 78
post-tensioning
defining 484, 527, 565, 645,
683, 738
definitions 292
flat plate tutorial
ACI 318-08 473
general information 400
specifying 400
terminology 292
Post-tensioning Flat Plate
Tutorial
EC2 / TR43 590
Post-Tensioning Flat Plate
Tutorial
BS8110 / TR43 554
CSA A23.3-04 672
IS 456:2000 634
post-tensioning systems
about 98
RAM Concept
precision drawing
with snaps 73
precompression
effect of 1108
viewing in x-direction 335
print jobs
paging through 382
previewing 381
previewing active window
381
report, previewing 381
print scales
specifying 380
print setup options
changing 379
print viewpoint
setting 380
printed area
specifying with coordinates
380
printed area on plan
specifying 380
printer options
configuring 378
selecting 378
printers
selection 378, 379
printing
about 377
general options 378
optimizations 382
priority method
about 165
profile points
cannot auto-position at (x,y)
due to profile point
value 437
error 438
error, not within the slab
vertically 438
warning 437
profile polylines
defining using the Generate
Profile Polylines tool
302
drawing 301
properties 296
1129
profiling 401
program reinforcement
detailing methods 807
Program reinforcement
about 268
program tendons tool
generating 304
projection
setting 65
properties
loading 101
PT design
changing to RC design 255
PT flat plate tutorial
AS3600-2001 516
PT Systems 96
punching
analysis 360
Punching Check Auditor
about information displayed
by 370
using 371
punching check numbers
displaying 441
punching check properties
advice on the selection of
1107
punching resistance
calculation of, for
unreinforced section
1102, 1104, 1105
punching shear
ACI 318 1095, 1096
checking for 502
checks 402
CSA A23.3 1097, 1098
design 840, 864, 889, 914,
939, 957, 975, 1025,
1079
design notes 1087
failure 1087
handling by building codes
1087
handling by RAM Concept
1088, 1089
overview 1087
questions about 429
User Manual
questions
frequently asked 410
rafts
error, is likely unstable 441
RAM Concept
how it calculates envelope
results 766
learning 51
options 49
plotting 747
relevant axes 747
result categories in 765
results
envelope 766
RAM Concept
standard 765
RAM Concept interface 136
RAM Concept reactions
using in RAM Concrete 392
RAM Structural System
reimporting from 132
RAM Structural System - RAM
Concept link
how it works 392
range
pages 378
RC design
changing to, from PT design
255
Reaction 351
Reaction tab 351
reactions
export of 389
questions about 424
rebar
Concept, exporting to ISM
153
recalculating 328
rectangular slab mesh areas
drawing 188
recursions
too deep 435
warning 435
reducible loading layers
copying to 719
reference lines
adding 81
regenerating 67
reinforced concrete
slab, tutorial 444
reinforcement
applying hooks near slab
edge 283
AS3600 specific questions
428
BS8110 specific questions
428
calculation of supplemental
995, 996
calculation of supplemental
untensioned 995,
1024
1130
User Manual
reinforcement behavior
bonded prestressed 827,
850, 875, 900, 925,
946, 964, 983, 1010,
1038, 1066
non-prestressed 827, 849,
874, 900, 925, 946,
964, 1066
unbonded prestressed 828,
850, 875, 900, 925,
946, 964, 983, 1010,
1039, 1066
untensioned 982, 1009,
1038
reinforcement callouts
concentrated 288
distributed 288
reinforcement controlling
criteria
viewing 458
reinforcement drawings
concentrated examples
275279
distributed examples
275279
reinforcement locations
effects of ignore depth on
263
reinforcement objects
types 268
reinforcement plots
designing 460
viewing 333
reinforcement results
viewing 333
reinforcements
code minimum 984
drawing 273
other plan tools 282
relative coordinates
using 74
report
specifying as zero 89
report items
changing location 386
report print job
previewing 381
RAM Concept
Report Viewer
using 372
reports
changing contents 383
excluding items 384, 385
including items in 384, 385
opening previously saved
373
printing 374, 377
saving 373
resistance
design flexural
prestressed 862
factored moment, section
10.2 832
non prestressed 857
shear, of beams 857
shear, of prestressed beams
857
resonant responses
RMS values for 1113
response factor plots
evaluation of 1116
response factors
calculation of 1113, 1114
responses
impulsive footfall 1114
resonant footfall 1111
resonant vs. impulsive 1111
restraint
about 406
result objects
changing visibility 338
result plans
creating new 339
results
bending moments 588, 630,
670, 709
calculating 320, 329, 402,
453, 504, 545, 546,
581, 617, 663, 664,
698, 730, 731
calculating all 320
creating new plans 339
deflection 511, 550, 586,
627, 668, 707
1131
section
18.4.2b service compressive
stress limit 861
section 10.1
factored moment resistance
1071
User Manual
section 11.3
section 10.2
shear and torsion tension
factored moment
1074
resistance
shear resistance of
non prestressed 880,
beams
905, 930
non prestressed 857,
section 10.3.5
882
ductility
prestressed 908, 933
non prestressed 856,
torsion design 1075
881, 906,
section 11.4
931
shear resistance of
section 10.5.1
beams
minimum reinforcement
prestresesd 857
in beams
prestressed 882
non prestressed
1072
section 11.5
minimum reinforcement
beam torsion 908, 933
of flexural
section 11.6
members
beam torsion 883
non prestressed 881,
section 18.3.1.1a
906, 931,
initial compressive
1073
stress limit
section 10.5.2
at stressing 1076
redistribution of moments section 18.3.1.1b
ductility check
initial tensile stress limit
non prestressed
at stressing 1076
1073 section 18.3.2a
section 10.6.1
sustained compressive
beams and one-way
stress limit 1077
slabs
section 18.3.2b
crack control 1073
service compressive stress
minimum reinforcement
limit 1077
of flexural
section 18.3.3
members
service tensile stress limit
non prestressed
859, 909, 934
1074
servie tensile stress limit
section 10.6.4
884
minimum reinforcement
section 18.4.1a
of flexural
initial compressive stress
members
limit 910, 935
non prestressed 857,
intial compressive stress
882, 907,
limit 885
932
section 18.4.1b
section 11.2
initial tensile stress limit
shear resistance of
860, 885
beams
section 18.4.1c
non prestressed 907,
initial tensile stress limit
932
910, 935
RAM Concept
1132
section 18.4.2a
sustained compressive
stress limit 861, 885,
911, 936
section 18.4.2b
service compressive stress
limit 911, 936
section 18.4.2b service
compressive stress limit
886
section 18.4.4
reinforcement spacing limits
for class c members
861, 886, 911, 936
section 18.6.3.3
limitation on area of
prestressing tendons
1020
minimum longitudinal
reinforcement 1020
section 18.7
cracking moment 1077
design flexural
resistance
prestressed 862,
887, 912,
937
section 18.8.2
cracking moment 862, 887,
912, 937
minimum bonded
reinforcement 1078
section 18.8.3
minimum reinforcement
of flexural
members
prestressed 1078
section 18.9.2
minimum reinforcement
one way 863, 887,
913, 938
section 18.9.3.2
midpsan two way minimum
reinforcement 913
midspan two way minimum
reinforcement 863,
888, 938
User Manual
section 18.9.3.3
support two way minimum
reinforcement 864,
888, 914, 939
section 21.1.1
redistribution of
moments
ductility check 1020
section 22.1
ultimate limit state for
beams in flexure
1021
section 22.3
design shear resistance of
beams 1021
section 22.5
torsion 1023
section 22.7.1
flexural tension stresses in
concrete 1023
section 22.8.1
design compressive stresses
1024
section 22.8.2
design compressive
stresses
transfer 1024
section 26.5.1.1 1015
section 26.5.2.1 1015
section 3.12.11.2.4
beam bar spacing 992
section 3.12.11.2.7
slab bar spacing 993
section 3.12.5
minimum areas of
reinforcement in
members 991
section 3.2.2.1
redistribution of
moments
ductility check 989
section 3.4.4
design resistance moment of
beams 989
section 3.4.5
design shear resistance of
beams 990
RAM Concept
section 3.4.5.13
torsion 991
section 3.5.4
resistance moment of solid
slabs 991
section 3.5.5
shear resistance of solid
slabs 991
section 3.8.3
assessment of crack widths
1000
section 31.7.1 1016
section 37
redistribution of
moments
ductility check 1016
section 38
design resistance moment of
beams 1016
redistribution of
moments
ductility check 1016
section 4.12.2
limitation on area of
prestressing tendons
999
section 4.3.2.1
redistribution of
moments
ductility check 993
section 4.3.4.2
compressive stresses in
concrete 993
section 4.3.4.3
flexural tension stresses in
concrete 994
section 4.3.5.1
design compressive
stresses
transfer 996
section 4.3.5.2
design tensile stresses in
flexure
transter 997
section 4.3.7
ultimate limit state for
beams in flexure 997
1133
section 4.3.8
design shear resistance of
beams 998
shear slabs 999
section 4.3.9
torsion 999
section 4.4.1
shear slabs 999
section 40
design shear resistance
1017
section 41
torsion 1018
section 5.10.2.2
limitation of concrete
stress
transfer 1046
section 5.5
resdistribution of
moments
ductility check 1046
section 6.1
design resistance moment
1047
section 6.10.6
minimum un-tensioned
reinforcement 1001
section 6.2
design shear resistance
1047
section 6.3
torsion 1048
section 7.12
section shrinkage 930
shrinkage 854, 879, 905
temperature reinforcement
854, 879, 905, 930
section 7.8
minimum reinforcement in
slabs 1071
section 8.1
strength of beams in
bending 951, 969
section 8.1.3
ductility of beams in
bending 952
section 8.1.5
User Manual
ductility of beams in
bending 971
section 8.2
shear design 953, 971
section 8.3
beam torsion design 953,
972
section 8.6.1
RC beam crack control 954,
972
section 8.6.2
post tensioning beam crack
control 973
PT beam crack control 955
section 8.6.3.2c
minimum transverse
reinforcement 1020
section 9.1
strength of slabs in bending
955, 974
section 9.10
tying system for accidental
design situations
1052
section 9.2.1.1 1051
section 9.3.1.1
RC slab minimum
reinforcement 1052
section 9.4.1
rc slab crack control 974
RC slab crack control 955
section 9.4.2
post tensioning slab crack
control 974
PT slab crack control 956
section 9.4.3.2
shrinkage 957, 975
temperature 957, 975
section design
about "context" plots 358
process overview 768
section distribution plots 340
section shapes
ISM 148
section stresses
viewing 336
RAM Concept
1134
User Manual
slab openings
drawing 172
properties 172
slab plot limitations
Max and Min 350
slab plotting
about contexts 349
slab systems
two-way 859
slabs
about 348
about plotting contexts 349
error about 436
error, too many shapes
intersecting the
column shape at
(x,y) 442
ISM, importing to Concept
146
Max and Min context
limitations 350
modeling guidelines 146
reinforced concrete, tutorial
444
slope limits
inter cross section, trimming
231
soil bearings
questions about 432
Span Boundaries
editing span segments with
661
Span Boundary Polyline
drawing 539, 540
Span Boundary Polylines
drawing 499, 576, 612, 658,
659, 694
span cross section
editing orientation 539, 578
orientation, editing 612, 614
span cross section orienation
editing 657
span cross section orienations
editing 662
span cross section orientation
RAM Concept
1135
User Manual
stresses
concrete 704
cracking 1083
Strip
Strip tab 354
strip boundaries
defining manually 219
Strip Boundaries
editing span segments with
661
strip design
process overview 768
strip widths
defining manually 218
Strip Wizard
about 50
completing 402, 739
conclusion 740
loading settings 402, 403
PT Flat Plate Tutorial
comparison with
740
Ram Concept
proceeding with 739
RAM Concept
reinforcement
specifying
parameters
739
saving settings 402
starting 396, 735
tutorial 735
using 396
Strip Wizard settings
saving 403
strip-based initial bottom
stresses
viewing 336
strip-based initial top stresses
viewing 336
strip-based long term deflection
for ACI 318, viewing 334
for AS3600, viewing 334
for BS810, viewing 334
for EC2, viewing 334
strip-based service bottom
stresses
viewing 336
strip-based service top stresses
viewing 336
strips
hatching 498, 538, 575, 611,
656, 693, 724
structural systems
about 50
structure
questions about 414
structure definition
checking 172
structures
auto-stabilizing 440
defining 156, 444, 473, 516,
554, 590, 634, 672,
713
dynamic characteristics of
1109
questions about 415
viewing 447, 481, 524, 562,
598, 642, 680, 715
substructures
creating in ISM 140
support
1136
table columns
sizing 85
table row
sorting 85
tables
customizing 84
exporting 387
technical support 53
temperature reinforcement
section 7.12 832
templates
about 58
User Manual
tips 407
tendon definitions
all done on the tendon
parameters layers
299
most done on the tendon
parameters layers
299
tendon effective stresses
an error occured 439
error, tendon not connected
to any jacks 439
tendon jacks
drawing 315
tendon panel layouts
options 309
tendon parameter layers
all tendon definition done
on 299
tendon parameter plan objects
303
tendon parameter plan tools
303
tendon parameters
drawing 305
drawing examples 304
object types 293
tendon parameters layer 293
tendon parameters layers
most tedon definition done
on 299
tendon profile points
changing multiple 408
tendon profiles
error, a tendon is out of the
slab 438
tendon voids
drawing 303
properties 296
tendons
calculation of number of
ducts 772
changing multiple profile
points 408
creating, about 299
defining 292
definitions 292
RAM Concept
1137
beam 858
considerations 779
questions about 426
torsion design
Wood-Armer 780
TR 43
code rule selection 984
default loadings 976
minimum un-tensioned
reinforcement 1001
TR-43 5.8.1
post tensioning stresses
UK national annex
only 1053
TR-43 5.8.2
post tensioning initial
service transfer
stresses
UK national annex
only 1056
TR-43 5.8.3
post tensioning crack
control
UK national annex
only 1056
TR-43 5.8.5
post tensioning ultimate
limit state 1056
TR-43 5.8.7
un-tensioned
reinforcement
UK national annex
only 1057
TR-43 5.8.8
post tensioning
reinforcement
UK national annex
1057
Tr-43 5.9
shear strength 1058
TR43
code implementation 989
material behaviors 980
transfer loading types
about 103
transverse reinforcement
callouts 289
User Manual
drawing 275
error message 443
example drawings 280
properties 271
tributary areas
calculations 782
tutorials
Strip Wizard 735
two-way slab systems
chapter 13 836
typical live loads
defining 482, 525, 563, 599,
643, 681
RAM Concept
using to stretch 79
vibration
analysis 362
results 362
vibration analysis
calculating 329
notes 1109
plotting results 362
Vibration Calc Log
opening 330
vibration performance
evaluating 1114
vibrations
free 1109
options 326
view history 67
views
controlling 65
diminishing with the mouse
wheel button 66
magnifying specific areas in
66
magnifying with the mouse
button wheel 66
repositioning with a tool 67
repositioning with the
mouse wheel button
66
visible objects
setting 67
wall elements
about 180
drawing 182
drawing on slab elements
182
drawing where there are no
slab elements 183
properties 182
wall location
defining 522
wall locations
1138
User Manual